Fundamentals of English Grammar, Second Edition - Betty Schrampfer Azar

pháp tiếhg Anh *ih độ Trung cấp FUNDAMENTALS OF

ENGLISH GRAMMAR

------------------------------------- S econd Edition

Betty Schrampfer Azat N G U YỀN THÀNH Y ẾN

ĨKƯỜIỈC' D H D L - K T CÁ

T H Ư V ỉệ iM

NHÀ XUẤT BẢN THÀNH PHỐ Hồ CHÍ MINH

Contents PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION .................................................... 8 Chapter 1 PRESENT TIM E................................................... ............... 1-1 1-2 1-3 1-4 1-5

THE SIMPLE PRESENT AND THE PRESENT PROGRESSIVE........... .................... FORMS OF THE SIMPLE PRESENT AND THE PRESENT PROGRESSIVE .......... SPELLING: FINAL -S vs. -ES ..................................................................................... NONPROGRESSIVE VERBS ................................... ................................................... SIMPLE PRESENT AND PRESENT PROGRESSIVE: SHORT ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS ............... ..........................................................................................

9 11 12 16 17 20

Chapter 2 PAST TIME ............................................... ........................... 25 2-1 2-2 2-3 2-4 2-5 2-6 2-7 2-8 2-9 2-10

EXPRESSING PAST TIME: THE SIMPLE PAST....................................................... FORMS OF THE SIMPLE PAST................ .................................................................. THE PRINCIPAL PARTS OF A VERB......................................................................... IRREGULAR VERBS: A REFERENCE U S T ..................................... .......... ............... SPELLING OF -ING AND -ED FORMS .................................................................... THE SIMPLE PAST AND THE PAST PROGRESSIVE .............................................. FORMS OF THE PAST PROGRESSIVE ..................................................................... EXPRESSING PAST TIME: USING TIME CLAUSES................................................ EXPRESSING PAST HABIT: USED TO .................... ............................... ............... PREPOSITIONS OF TIME: IN, AT, and ON ......................................... ..................

25 26 28 29 37 42 43 47 52 54

Chapter 3 FUTURE TIME ..................................................................... 57 EXPRESSING FUTURE TIME: BE GOING TO and WILL ................................... FORMS WITH W IL L .............................................................................. .................... USING PROBABLY WITH WILL ............................................................................ BE GOING TO vs. WILL .................. ........................ ............................................. EXPRESSING FUTURE TIME IN TIME CLAUSES AND IF-CLAUSES.................. PARALLEL VERBS.................................................................... ............ ................. USING THE PRESENT PROGRESSIVE TO EXPRESS FUTURE TIM E.................. USING THE SIMPLE PRESENT TO EXPRESSFUTURE TIME ................................ PRESENT PLANS FOR FUTURE ACTIVITIES: USING INTEND, PLAN, H O P E .............................. .......... ...................... ........................................ ........... 3-10 IMMEDIATE FUTURE: USING BE ABOUT T O ..................................................... 3-1 3-2 3-3 3-4 3-5 3-6 3-7 3-8 3-9

FUNDAMENTALS

57 59 60 61 63 68 71 73 74 75

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 3

6-9 6-10 6-11 6-12 6-13 6-14 6-15

USING HOW O F T E N ............................................................................................... 159 USING HOW F A R ............................................................ ...................... .................. 160 EXPRESSING LENGTH OF TIME: IT + TAKE .................................................... 162 USING HOW LONG .......................... .........................................................................162 MORE QUESTIONS WITH HOW .............................................................................. 166 USING HOW ABOUT AND WHAT A B O U T ......................................................... 168 TAG QUESTIONS ........................................................................................................ 171

Chapter 7 THE PRESENT PERFECT AND THE PAST PERFECT......... 175 7-1 7-2 7-3 7-4 7-5 7-6 7-7 7-8 7-9 7-10

THE PAST PARTICIPLE ............................................................................................. 175 FORMS OF THE PRESENT PERFECT ..................... ................................................ 176 MEANINGS OF THE PRESENT PERFECT............................................................... 177 USING THE SIMPLE PAST vs. THE PRESENT PERFECT ..................................... 180 USING SINCE AND FOR ........................................................................................ 186 THE PRESENT PERFECT PROGRESSIVE ............................................................... 192 THE PRESENT PERFECT vs. THE PRESENT PERFECT PROGRESSIVE............. 194 MIDSENTENCE ADVERBS ................................................. ....................................... 197 USING ALREADY, YET, STILL, AND A N Y M O R E ............................................ 202 USING THE PAST PERFECT....... ................................................................................ 206

Chapter 8 COUNT / NONCOUNT NOUNS AND ARTICLES.............. 210 8-1 8-2 8-3 8-4 8-5 8-6 8-7 8-8

COUNT AND NONCOUNT NOUNS ........ .................................................................. 210 NONCOUNT NOUNS.......................... ......................................................................... 211 MORE NONCOUNT NOUNS ............. ......................................................................... 215 NOUNS THAT CAN BE COUNT OR NONCOUNT....................................................219 USING UNITS OF MEASURE WITH NONCOUNT NOUNS..... ............................... 221 GUIDELINES FOR ARTICLE USAGE .........................................................................223 USING EXPRESSIONS OF QUANTITY AS PRONOUNS............. ............................ 233 NONSPECIFIC OBJECT PRONOUNS: SOME, ANY, AND ONE .........................235

Chapter 9 CONNECTING IDEAS....................................................... 238 9-1 9-2 9-3 9-4 9-5 9-6 9-7 9-8 9-9

CONNECTING IDEAS WITH AND .............................................................................. 239 CONNECTING IDEAS WITH BU T AND OR ............................................................. 242 CONNECTING IDEAS WITH so ............................................. .................................... 243 USING AUXILIARY VERBS AFTER B U T AND A N D ...............................................245 USING AND + TOO, so, EITHER, NEITH ER ..................................................247 CONNECTING IDEAS WITH BECAUSE ................................................................... 252 CONNECTING IDEAS WITH EVEN THOUGH/ALTHOUG H .............................. 256 PHRASAL VERBS (SEPARABLE) ................................................................................ 259 PHRASAL VERBS (NONSEPARABLE).........................................................................262

Chapter 10 10-1 10-2

GERUNDS AND INFINITIVES.......................................265

GERUNDS AND INFINITIVES: INTRODUCTION .....................................................265 VERB + GERUND ............................................ ......... ..................................................267 FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 5

13-6 13-7 13-8 13-9

REPEATING A COMPARATIVE.................................................................................. 359 USING DOUBLE COMPARATIVES ............................................................................ 360 USING SUPERLATIVES................................................................................................ 362 USING THE SAME, SIMILAR, DIFFERENT, LIKE, ALIKE ........................ 364

Chapter 14 14-1 14-2 14-3 14-4 14-5 14-6 14-7

Chapter 15 15-1 15-2 15-3 15-4 15-5 15-6 15-7

QUOTED SPEECH AND REPORTED SPEECH .............387

QUOTED SPEECH ....................................................................... ............................... 387 QUOTED SPEECH vs. REPORTED SPEECH ............................................................ 390 VERB FORM USAGE IN REPORTED SPEECH: FORMAL SEQUENCE OF TENSES .................... .... .......................... ............................ .................................... 391 USING SA Y vs. T E L L ......... .......................................................................................392 USING A SK I F ............................................................................................................ 393 USING VERB + INFINITIVE TO REPORT SPEECH ................................................ 399 SOME TROUBLESOME VERBS: ADVISE, SUGGEST, AND RECOMMEND .............................................................................................................403

Chapter 16 16-1 16-2 16-3 16-4 16-5 16-6

NOUN CLAUSES.............................................................368

NOUN CLAUSES: INTRODUCTION .......................................................................... 368 NOUN CLAUSES THAT BEGIN WITH A QUESTION WORD.................................. 369 NOUN CLAUSES WITH WHO, WHAT, WHOSE + B E ..................................... 371 NOUN CLAUSES WHICH BEGIN WITH IF OR WHETHER ............................... 375 NOUN CLAUSES WHICH BEGIN WITH TH AT ..................................................... 380 SUBSTITUTING so FOR A “THAT-CLAUSE” IN CONVERSATIONAL RESPONSES ....... ........................................................................................................... 382 OTHER USES OF ‘THAT-CLAUSES”.........................................................................384

USING WISH; USING IF ................................................ 406

EXPRESSING WISHES ABOUT THE PRESENT/FUTURE .................................... 406 EXPRESSING WISHES ABOUT THE PAST ............................................................ 410 USING IF: CONTRARY-TO-FACT IN THE PRESENT/FUTURE ............................ 414 USING IF: TRUE vs. CONTRARY-TO-FACT IN THE PRESENT/FUTURE ..........417 USING IF: CONTRARY TO-FACT IN THE PA ST ..................................................... 419 SUMMARY: VERB FORMS IN SENTENCES WITH IF (CONDITIONAL SENTENCES) ................................................................................... 421

Appendix Appendix Appendix Appendix Appendix

1 2 3 4 5

PREPOSITION COMBINATIONS...................................... 424 PHRASAL VERBS ............................................................426 GUIDE FOR CORRECTING WRITING ERRORS............ 428 BASIC VOCABULARY LIST ............................................430 DIFFERENCES BETWEEN AMERICAN ENGLISH AND BRITISH ENGLISH................................................... 437 INDEX ................................................... ............................................439

ANSWER KEY ...........................................................................................................4 4 7 FUNDAMENTALS OF EN G LISH G R A M M A R - 7

1

CHAPTER I

Present Time Thời gian hiện tại

□ EXERCISE 1 - ORAL: Pair up with another student in the class. Interview each other. T h en introduce each o th e r to th e rest of th e class. In your conversation w ith th e other person, find o u t th is person's name, native counơy, residence, fieldof study or place o f work, and free-tvne activities or hobbies. T ake notes d u rin g th e interview. 1. Below is an exam ple o f a possible conversation.

A: Hi. My name is Kunio. B: KUNIO: MARIA: KUNIO: MARIA:

Hi. My nam e is Maria. I'm glad to m eet you. I'm glad to m eet you, too. W here are you from? I'm from Mexico. W here are you from? I'm from Japan. W here are you living now?

KUNIO: On Fifth Avenue in an apartment. And you? MARIA: I’m living in a dorm. KƯNIO: What is your field of study?

MARIA: Business. After I study English, I'm going to attend the School of Business Admi­ nistration. How about you? What's your major? KUNIO: Chemistry. MARIA: KUNIO: MARIA: KUNIO: MARIA: KUNIO:

What do you like to do in your free time? Do you have any hobbies? I like to swim. How about you? I read a lot, and I collect stam ps from all over the world. Really? Would you like som e stam ps from Japan? Sure! T hat would be great. Thanks. I have to w rite your full nam e on th e board when I introduce you to the class. How do you spell your name?

MARIA: My first name is Maria: M-A-R-I-A. My last name is Lopez. KUNIO: My first name is Kunio: K-U-N-I-O. My family name is Akiwa. MARIA: Kunio Akiwa. Is that right? KUNIO: Yes, it is. It's been nice talking with you. MARIA: I enjoyed it, too. FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 9

1-1 THE SIMPLE PRESENT AND THE PRESENT PROGRESSIVE THÌ HIỆN TẠI ĐƠN VÀ THÌ HIỆN TẠI TIỀP DIỄN THE SIMPLE PRESENT (b) »S T i

% o c

x xx x: x x -xx

(c:) (d)[) (e ) (f)

\nn (takes) a shower ỉvepưgỹT I' usually ea^ lunch at the cafeteria: Babies cry. The earth revolves around the sun. A square has four equal sides. The sky is blue.

The simple present expresses daily habits or usual activities, as in (a) and (b). Thì hiện tại đơn diễn tả các thói quen hàng ngày hoặc các hoạt động thường xuyên, như trong (a) và (b). The simple present expresses ge­ neral statements o f fact, as in (c) and (d). In sum, the simple present is used for events or situations th at exist always, usually, o r habitually in th e past, p resent, an d future.

Thì hiện tại đơn diễn tả các câu sự kiện khái quái, như trong (c) và (d). Nói tóm lại, thì hiện tại đơn được dùng cho các sự việc hoậc tình huống luôn luôn, thường thường, hoặc thường xuyên hiện hũu trong quá khứ, hiện tại, và tương lai. THE PRESENT PROGRESSIVE

es s

(g) Ann can't come to the phone right now be­ cause she is taking a shower. (h) It's noon. I am eating lunch at the cafeteria right now. ( i ) Jimmy and Susie are babies. They are crying. I can hear them right now. Maybe they are hungry.

The present progressive expresses an activity that ừ m progress {is oc­ curring, is happening) right now. The event is in progress at the time the speaker is saying die sentence. The event began in the past, is in progress now, and will probably continue into the future. Thì hiện tại tiếp diễn diễn tả một hoạt dộng đang diễn tiến (dang xảy ra) hiện giờ. Sự việc đó đang diễn tiến vào lúc người nói đang nói câu đó. Sự việc đó đã bắt đầu trong quá khứ, đang diễn tiến hiện giờ, và có lẽ sẽ tiếp tục đến tương lai. FORM: am, ừ, are + -ing. DẠNG: am, ừ, are + -ing.

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 11

9. It's 7:30 A.M. and the Wilsons are in their kitchen. Mrs. Wilson (sit) at the breakfast table. She (read) (read)

,

(pour) our)

/C

L

HVi.Xv rt

ị ", . r ^

■

the morning paper. She

_______________ the newspaper every morning. Mr. Wilson pfXA /S-A cy pr\A

a cup of coffee. He (drink)

--aW a W XX:--,__________ - 7-

two cups of coffee every morning before he (go)

a f u b b ___to work. T

is a cartoon on TV, but th e children (watch, not) \J , j'if i n

{play)

'Ai-Tfj.

it. They

h if U j (,________ with th eir toys instead. T hey usually {watch)

iX fl c i v «5 ___________cajtoons in the morning, but this morning they (pay, not) -'J' y J

P o u f ______ aiỊý attention to the TV. Mr. and Mrs. Wilson (watch, not)

U n ỊilK -

th è ^ v either. They (like, not)

kvv u r n ©

i( h i

to watch cartoons.

Fm

the bus to school every day. A I instead.[. (Take, you) Ị)? A ệ i U . fetff #

10. Alice (take, not) She usually (walk)

-li h •

À n ( f.lì

AA/tf

) fi r iy \), W yl, •?

the bus to get to school every day, or (walk,you)

□ EXERCISE 3 - ORAL (BOOKS CLOSED): STUDENT A: P e rfo rm a n action. STUDENT B: D escrib e th e actio n , u s in g STUDENT A’s n a m e a n d th e p re s e n t p ro g re s­ sive. Example: STUDENT A: TEACHER: STUDENT B:

stand next to your desk (Student A stands up.) Who is standing next to her desk? OR: What is (Maria) doing? (Maria) is standing next to her desk.

1. stand up 2. smile 3. whistle

4. open or d ose the door 5. hum 6. bite your fingernails

7. 8. 9. 10.

read your grammar book erase the board look at the ceiling hold your pen in your left hand

11. rub your palms together

12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17.

kick your desk (softly) knock on the door sit on the floor shake hands with someone look at your watch count aloud the number of people in the room 18. shake your head “no” 19. scratch your head 20. Perform any action you choose. Use objects in the classroom if you wish. FUNDAMENTALS

C.Ố

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 13

A: Yes. T: What do you usually have for breakfast? A: Bread and cheese and coffee. Sometimes I have an egg. T: Do you ever have cereal for breakfast? A: No, I don't. TEACHER (to STUDENT B): Can you tell us about ( . . . ) ? What does he/she usually do in the morning? STUDENT B: He/She usually gets up at seven. He/She eats breakfast. T: Always? B: Yes. He/She always eats breakfast. He/She usually has bread and cheese and coffee for breakfast, but sometimes he/she has an egg. He/She never has ce­ real for breakfast. 1. from 6:00 A.M. to 9:00 AM.

2. from 3.. from 4. from 5. from

9:00 A.M. to noon noon to 3:00 P.M. 3:00 P.M. to 6:00 P.M. 6:00 PM. until you go to bed

□ EXERCISE 6 - ORAL (BOOKS CLOSED): Answer the questions. Use fre­ quency adverbs. Example:

take a bus to school

Response:

I usually take the bus. OR: I never take the bus. OR: I always take the bus. (etc.)

How often do you take a bus to school?

PART I: How often do you . . .?

1. sleep past noon 2. w ear a hat to school 3. wash dishes after dinner 4. eat fish for dinner

5. go to (a particular place in thừ city) on weekends 6. drink (a particular beverage) 7. speak (your native language) instead of English w hen you're with your friends 8. go swimming before you come to class in th e morning 9. watch TV before you com e to school in the morning

10. listen to the radio in the evening PART II: What are some things you always/usually/often/sometimes/seldom/ rarely/never do . . .? 1. when you eat dinner 2. when you get ready to go to bed at night 3. when you travel abroad

4. when you meet a new person 5. when you're on vacation 6. in this classroom FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 15

□ EXERCISE 7: U nderline th e VERB in each sentence. A dd final -s/-es to th e verb if necessary. Do ,not chan g e an y o th e r words. t, ■ A bird sing. , A bird sings. 1. 2. Birds sing. - (no change) f i ■V3. 4. 5. 6.

\oó>

'V:

V Wood float'on water. -ĩ> Rivers flow'ioward th e sea. A W My rnofKer worry' about me. 'A student b u $ a lot of books at th e beginning of each term .

7. Airplanes fly all around the world.

tijt b

.

-I r.y

,

8. Mr. Wong teach C hinese at th e university. ^ f a n iC /■

9. The teacher ask us a lot of questions in class every day.-^

CtslcS

10. Mr. Smith w atcif gam e shows on TV every evening. -'Ị >/,od-c'V\S,c-

11. Music consist of^)leasant sounds. ccv !'• 12. Pesticides A s tr a y insects. J oBỉh. Ỉ 0' 13. Dust travel through the air. ; V 'i i ; . 14. T he front page of a new spaper contain th e m ost im portant new s of th e day.

15. Water freeze at 32°F (0°C) and boil at 212°F (100°C). 16. Ms. Taylor never cross the street in the middle of a block. She always walk to the comer and use the pedestrian walkway. 17. Many parts of the world enjoy four seasons: spring, summer, autumn, and winter. Each season last three m onths and bring changes in th e w eather.

1-4 NONPROGRESSIVE VERBS CÁ C ĐỘNG Từ KHÔNG DỪNG THÌ TIỀP DIỄN (a) I hear a bird. It is singing. (b) I'm hungry. I w ant a sand­ wich. (c) This book belongs to Mikhail.

Som e verbs are n o t u sed in progressive tenses.

Một số động từ không được dùng ở thì tiếp diễn. CORRECT: I hear a bird (right now). ĐÚNG: I hear a bird (hiện giở). INCORRECT: la m hearing a b td (right now). SAI: I am hearing a bird (hiện giờ).

NONPROGRESSIVE VERBS CÁC ĐỘNG TỪ KHÔNG DÙNG THÌ TIẾP D1ÊN own hear believe be sở hữu tin nghe là, ở have* see thàứ* exừt có nghĩ thấy hiện hũu possess understand sở hũu,có hiểu belong know thuộc về biết * Sometimes think and have are used in pro­ gressive tenses.

need cần want muốn prefer thích ... hơn

like thích love yêu hate ghét

forget quên remember nhớ

Đôi khi think và have được dùngỏthì tiếpdiễn.

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 17

6. Right now I (think) 7. I (think)

jVt

i W t ft

about sea gulls and waves.

that sea-gulls are beautiful birds.

tfxy

la rA (think) 8. A: Who is that manr

Y\ S ara_________________

cats. She

__________________ pets, but today she

enjoys her two cats. 7. Now you have a job every summer. H ave you always worked during summers? -> W hat_____________________ in summer? 8. When I was m high school, I wore a uniform to school. -» I __________________

a uniform to school, but now I don't.

9. When I was a child, I drank a lot o f miỉk. I never drank coffee. H ow about you? -> I _____________________ milk with every meal. I ______________________ coffee, but now I have at least one cup every d a y ._______________ ______ a lot of milk when

you were a child? 10. When I was a child, I watched cartoons on TV. I don't watch cartoons anymore. N ow I watch news programs. H ow about yo u Ĩ -> I __________________________ cartoons on TV, but I don't anymore. I _______ news programs, but now I do. W hat____________________ on TV when you were a little kid?

□ EXERCISE 23: Complete the sentences. Each sentence should have a form of used to. A d d y o u r ow n w ords. 1. I

u s e d to r-id&

my bicycle to work, but now I take the bus.

2. What time d id ỷOa. U.S& to ỷ o 3. I

did* t U.&&to stũ .ỷ up

to bed when you were a child? past midnight, but now I often go to bed very late be­

cause I have to study. 4. I __________________ wild and reckless when I was younger, but now I'm not. 5. T o m ___________________ tennis after work every day, but now he doesn't. 6. I _____________________ any physical exercise, but now I exercise for an hour every day. 7. When you were a child, w h ere_____________________ on vacation? 8. Ann ____________________ most of her lunches and dinners at restaurants before she got married. 9. I used to spend a lot of time with_____________________________________ , but now__. 10. When you were a little kid, w h at______________________after school?

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 53

(f) (g) (h) (i)

I was bom in October. I was bom in 1975. I was bom in the twentieth century. The weather is hot in (the) siunmer. **

( j ) I was bom on October 31,1975. (k) I went to a movie on Thursday. (1) I have class on Thursday mommg(s).

in + a month/a year/a centuryỊa season in + thángỊnămỊthế kỷ/mùa

on + a date/a weekday on + ngày tháng! các ngày trong tuần on + weekday momùig(s), aftemoon(s),

evenừig(s) on + (các) buổi sáng, (các) buổi chiều, (các) buổi tối của các ngày trong tuần ** In expressions with the seasons, the is optional:in (the) spring, in (the) summer, in(the) fallỊautumn, in (the) winter.

□

Trong các thành ngữ về các mùa; có thể có hoặc không có the: in (the) spring, in(the) sum-

mer, in (the) falljautwrm, m (the) winter.

EXERCISE 2 5 - PREPOSITIONS: Complete the sentences with m, at, or on.

All of th e expressions contain tim e expressions. 1. History is the study of events th at o c cu rred ______________th e past.

2. We don't know what will happen_____________ the future. 3. Newspapers report events that happen____________the present. 4. Last year I was a junior in high school.___________ present, I am a senior in high school. 5. I am a student____________ the present time, but I will graduate next month. 6. Ms. Walker can't come to the phone right now. She's in a m eeting____________ the moment. 7. I usually take a w alk____________ the morning before I go to work. 8. Frank likes to take a n a p ____________ the afternoon. 9. O ur family enjoys spending tim e to g e th e r_____________the evening.

10. Our children always stay hom e____________ night. 11. I ate lunch__________

noon.

12. I got hom e________

midnight.

13. I moved to this c ity ____________ September. 14. I moved h e re ____________1990. 15. I moved h e re ____________September 1990. 16. I moved h e re ____________September 3. 17. I moved h e re ____________September 3,

1990.

18. I moved h e re ____________the fall. FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 55

I.

CHAPTER 3

Future Time Thời gian tương lai

3-1

E X P R E S S IN G F U T U R E T I M E : BE GOING TO and WILL DIỀN TẢ THỜI GIAN TƯƠNG LAI: BE GOING TO và WILL FUTURE

(a) I am going to leave at nine to­ morrow morning. (b) I will leave at nine tomorrow morning. (c) Marie ừ gomg to be at the meeting tonight. (d) Marie will be at the meeting tonight.

(e) I shall leave at nine tomorrow morning. (f) We shall leave at nine tomorrow morning.

Be going to and will are used to express future time. Be going to {sắp) và will (sẽ) được dùng để diễn tả thời gian tương lai. (a) and (b) have the same meaning. . (a) và (b) có cùng nghĩa. (c) and (d) have the same m eaning* (c) và (d) có cùng nghĩa.

The use of shall (w ith/or we) to express

future time is infrequent and formal. Cách dùng shall (với I hoặc we) để diễn tả thời gian tương lai không thường dùng và trang trọng.

*Will and be going to usually give the same meaning, but sometimes they express different meanings. The differences are discussed in Chart 3-4.

Will và be going to thường cho cùng nghĩa, nhưng đôi khi chúng diên tả các nghĩa khác

nhau. Các sự khác nhau này dược bân ở Bảng 3-4.

□ EXERCISE 1 - ORAL (BOOKS CLOSED): P ractice u sin g be going to. STUDENT A:

STUDENT B: STUDENT C:

Make a sentence with be going to about your future activities. Ask a question about STUDENT A's sentence. Answer the question.

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 57

□ EXERCISE 4: ORAL: Complete th e sentences with a pronoun + a form of be go­ ing to. U se a ftiture tim e expression. U se too (with affirmative sentences) or eiứìer (with negative sentences). Example: I didn't study last night, a n d ___ Response: I didn't study last night, and I'm not going to study tonight either. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

I did my homework yesterday, and . . . . I wasn't at home last night, and . . . . We didn't have a grammar quiz today, and . . . . Our teacher is in class today, and . . . . It's (cold/hot Inice) today, and . . . . I didn't go bowling today, and . . . . I brought my umbrella with me today, and . . . .

8. I didn't get hit by a truck on my way to school today, and . . . .

9. The sun rose before six today, and . . . . 10. We didn't have pizza for breakfast this morning, and . . . .

3-2

F O R M S W IT H WILL

CÁC DẠNG VỚI WILL

STATEMENT

{I-You-She-He-It-We-They} will come tomoưow.

NEGATIVE

{I-You-She-He-It-We-They} will not (won’t) come tomorrow.

QUESTION

Will {I-you-she-he-it-we-they} come tomorrow?

SHORT ANSWER No, CONTRACTIONS

{I-you-she-he-it-we-they} } 1

m ^ 'lt won't.

I'll, you'll, she'll, he'll, it'll, we'll, Will is usually contracted with pronouns in both speech and they'll informal writing. Will thường được rút gọn với các đại từ trong cả lỡi nói và văn viết thân mật.

Bob + will = “Bob'll” the teacher will = “the teacher'll”

FUNDAMENTALS

Will is usually contracted with nouns in speech, but usually not in writing. Will thường được rứt gọn với các danh từ trong lời nói, nhưng thường không được rút gọn trong văn viết.

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 59

□

EXERCISE 7: Complete th e sentences. Use a pronoun + willjwon 't. Use probably. 1. I went to the library last night, and

ỉ ể ê p r o Ị>ũ./)ểỷỹo

there tonight too.

2. Ann didn't come to class today, anjd skí> Ũ^oẾo.èểỷ WOK 160K& tom orrow either.

3. I watched TV last night, a n d _____________________ TV tonight too. 4. I wasn't at home last night, a n d _____________________ at home tonight either. 5. Greg went to bed early last night, and_____________________to bed early tonight too. 6. Jack didn't hand his homework in today, and ___________________________it in tomorrow either. 7. It's hot today, an d _____________________ hot tomorrow too. 8. My friends didn't come over last night, an d _____________________ over tonight either. 9. The students had a quiz today, an d ____________________ _ one tomorrow too. 10. Alice didn't ride her bike to school today, an d ______________________it to school tomorrow either.

3-4 B E GOING TO vs. WILL BE GOING TO đôi chiều với WILL (a) She ừ going to succeed because she works hard. (b) She will succeed because she works hard.

Be going to and will are die same when they are used to make predictions about the fu­ ture. (a) and (b) have die same meaning. Be going to và will giống nhau khi chúng được dùng để đưa ra các dự đoán về tuơng )ai. (a) và (b) có cùng nghĩa, (sẽ).

(c) I bought some wood because I am going to build a bookcase for my apartment.

Be going to (but not wilt) is used to express a preconceived plan. In (c): The speaker is planning to build a bookcase. Be going to ưlự định) (chứ không phải will) được dùng để diễn tả một kế hoạch được định trước. Trong (c): NgUởi nói đang d ự định đóng một tủ

sách. (d) This chair is too heavy for you to carry alone. I'll help you.

Will (but not be going to) is used to volunteer or express willingness. In (d): The speaker is happy to help. Will (sẩn lòttịị) (chứ không phải be going to) được dùng để tình nguyện hoặc diễn tả sự sẵn lòng. Trong (d): Người nói vui lòng giúp.

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 61

11. A: If you can wait just a few minutes, I ______________________walk to the meeting with you. B: Okay. I _____________________ meet you by the elevator. Okay? A: Okay. I _____________________ wait for you there.

12. A: Excuse me, b u t . . . . B: I _____________________ be with you in a moment. A: Thanks.

3-5 EXPRESSING FUTURE TIME IN TIME CLAUSES AND “JF-CLAUSES” DIỀN TẢ THỜI GIAN TƯƠNG LAI TRONG C Á C M Ệ N H Đ Ể THỜI G IA N VÀ “ M ỆN H Đ É IF " (a) Before I go to class tomorrow, I'm going to eat breakfast. (b) I'm going to eat dinner at 6:00 to­ night. A fter I eat dinner, I'm going to study in my room.

T he sim ple p resen t is used in a future tim e

clause. Be going to and will are NOT used in a fu­ ture tim e clause. Thì hiện tại đơn dược dùng trong mệnh đề thời gian tương lai. Be going to và will KHÔNG được dùng trong mệnh đề thời gian tương lai. before \ + subject and verb + a after I time clause* when I + chủ ngữ và động từ + as soon as I mệnh đề thời gian

(c) I'll give Mary your message when I see her tomorrow. (d) It's raining right now. A s soon as the ram stops, I'm going to walk downtown.

In (a): The speaker is talking a b o u t tw o events: going to class an d eating breakfast. Both events are in th e future. However, th e speaker uses th e

simple present (not be going to or wilt) to talk ab o u t going to class becau se th e verb occurs in a tim e clause:

Trorig (a): Người nói đang nói về hai sự việc: đi học và ăn sáng. Cả hai sự việc đều ở tương lai. Tuy nhiên, ngiiời nói dùng thì hiện tại đơn (chứ không phải be going to hay wilt) đ ể nói về việc đi học vì

động từ diễn ra trong mệnh đề thời gian: Before I g o to class tomorrow . . . . *See Chapter 16 for other uses of "ĩ/clauses."

Xem chương 16 về các cách dùng khác của

"mệnh đề if.”

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAMMAR

- 63

8.

(as soon as)

First: Then:

The rain will stop. The children are going to go outside and play.

0.

(as soon as)

First. Then:

The teacher will get here. Class will begin.

10.

(before)

First: Then:

The Robertsons will get some travelers' checks. They will leave on vacation.

11.

(as soon as)

First: Then:

I will get home tonight. I'm going to take a hot bath.

12.

(when)

First: Then:

I’m going to go shopping tomorrow. I’m going to buy a new pair of shoes.

□ 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

EXERCISE 10: Com plete th e following sentences with your own words. I'm going to eat dinner before I . . . . As soon as I get home tonight, I . . . . I'm going to call my friend after I . . . . My life will be easy after I . . . . Before I go to bed tonight, I . . . . When I'm in Florida next month, I . . . . I'll call you as soon as I . . . . I'm going to visit my aunt and uncle when . . . .

□ EXERCISE 11: Combine the ideas of the two sentences into one sentence by using an “i/-clause.” POSSIBLE C O N D ITIO N 1. Maybe it will rain tomorrow. ■

-> RESULT - > I'm going to stay home.

it rains tomorrow, i'm poiup to stgtf> fame.

OR:

/'mỷoÌKỹ to stop home /jf it rains tomorrou/. * 2. Maybe it will be hot tomorrow. 3. Maybe it will snow tomorrow. -

-> I'm going to go swimming. -> Betsy isn't going to ride her bike to school.

4. Maybe Adam will have enough time.-> He'll finish his composition tonight. 5. Maybe I won't get a letter tomorrow.---------------- > 111 call my parents.

* Notice the punctuation in the example. A comma is used when the "i/clause" comes before the main clause. No comma is used when the "(/-clause" follows the main clause. FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 65

to bed last night, he

c. Before Tom (go) (take) _________

a shower. a shower last night, the phone

d. While Tom {take) . (ring)__________

last night, Tom

e. As soon as the phone (ring) {jump) f. As soon as Tom (get) . cbrush) ____________

out of the shower to answer it. _ _ _ _ _ up tomorrow morning, he his teeth. his teeth as soon as he

g. Tom always {brush)

(get)________ ____ 2. a. After I (get) (drm k)____ b. After I (.get) (drink)____ c. After I (get) _ {drink)_____ d. While I (drink) (come) _______

up. ____ home from school every afternoon, I usually a cup of tea. home from school tomorrow afternoon, I a cup of tea. ____ home from school yesterday, I a cup of tea. ____ a cup of tea yesterday afternoon, my neighbor _ over, so I (offer)_____________________ her a

cup of tea, too. over again tomorrow. When she

e. My neighbor (drop) . (come)_______ _ 3. Jane {meet) (iarrive) ___ 4. If I (see)__ _

,1 (make)_

____________ a cup of tea for her.

me at the airport when my plane _ tomorrow. him

Mike tomorrow, I (tell) .

about the party. 5. ] go to New York often. When I (be)____ ________ (see)_____________ _ a Broadway play.

in New York, I usually

in New York next week, I 6. When I (be) __________________________ ___ at the Park Plaza Hotel. (sta y)_______________ _ to the beach tomorrow if the weather 7. Cindy and I {go) . warm and sunny. {bè)__________ ___________ __ over in class yesterday, the students 8. As soon as the test {be) __ the room. (leave)______________ FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAMMAR

- 67

□ EXERCISE 15: Complete th e sentences with the correct forms of the words parentheses. 1. When I (walk) _____________________ into the living room yesterday evening, Grandpa (read)__________________ a newspaper and (smoke)___________________ his pipe. 2. Helen will graduate next semester. She {move)_____________________ to New York and (look)___________________ for a job after she (graduate) ___________________ . 3. Every day my neighbor (call)_____________________ me on the phone and (complain) _____________________ about the weather. 4. Look at Erin! She (cry)________________________ and (laugh)___________________ at the same time. I wonder if she is happy or sad. 5. I'm beat! I can't wait to get home. After I (get)_________________________ home, I (take)__________________________ a hot shower and (go)_____________________ to bed. _

6. Yesterday my dog (dig)_______________ a hole in the back yard and (bury)_____________________ a bone. 7. I'm tired of this cold w eather. As soon as spring (come) _______________________ ,

I (play)_____________________ tennis and (jog) ______________________ in the park as often as possible. □ EXERCISE 16: C om plete th e sentences b y using a form o f th e words in p are n ­ theses. 1. It's getting late, but before I (go)_____________________ to bed, I (finish)______ ______________ my homework and (write)_____________________ a couple of letters. 2. While I (make)____________________ dinner last night, some grease (spilt)_____________________out of the frying pan and (catch)___________________ on fire. When the smoke detector on the ceiling (start)_____________________ to buzz, my roommate (run)_____________________ into the kitchen to find out what was wrong. He (think)_____________________ that the house was on fire! 3. Mark is obsessed with video games. He (play) ______________________ video games morning, noon, and night. Sometimes he [cut)______________________class to play the games. Right now he (do, not) ______________________very well in school. If he

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 69

3-7 USING THE PRESENT PROGRESSIVE TO EXPRESS F U T U R E T IM E

DÙNG THÌ HIỆN TẠI TIỀP DIỄN Đ Ể DIỄN TẢ THỜI GIAN TƯƠNG LAI

(a) Don is going to come to the party tomcHTow night.

(b) Don is coming

to the party

tomorrow night.

(c) We're going to go to a movie tonight. (d) We're going to a movie tonight.

Sometimes the present progressive is used to express future time, (a) and (b) have the same meaning. The present progressive is used to express future time when the sentence con­ cerns a definite plan, a definite intention,

a definite future activity.* Đôí khi thì hiện tại tiếp diễn được đùng để diễn tả thời gian tương lai. (a) và (b) có cùng nghĩa. Thì hiện tại tiếp diên được dùng để diên tả thời gian tương lai khi câu nói về một kếhoạch rõ ràng, một dựđịnh rõ ràng, một hoạt dộng tương lai rõ ràng.

(e) I'm going to stay home tonight. (f) I'm staying home tonight. (g) Ann is going to fly to Chicago next week. (h) Ann ừ flying to Chicago next week.

Verbs such as come, go, stay, arrive, leave are frequently used in the present progressive to express future time. Such verbs express defi­ nite plans. Các động từ như come (đêh), gọ idi), stay (ở), ar­ rive (đêh), leave (ra đi) thường được dùng ở thì hiện tại tiếp diễn để diễn tả thời gian tương lai.

( i ) Bob is going to take a taxi to the airport tomorrow. ( j ) Bob is taking a taxi to the

Các động từ như vậy diễn tả các kếhoạch rõ ràng.

airport tomorrow.

(k) A: You shouldn't buy that used car. It's in terrible condition. It costs too much. You don't have enough money. You']) have to get insurance, and you can't af­ ford the insurance. Buying that used car is a crazy idea. B: 1 am buying that used car to­ morrow morning! My mind is made up. Nobody—not you, not my mother, not my fa­ ther—can stop me. I'm buying that car, and that's it! I don't want to talk about it anymore. A: Oh well, it's your money.

Verbs expressing planned m eans of transpor­ tation in the future are also frequently used in the present progressive; for example, fly, walk, ride, drive, take (a bus, a taxi, etc.). Các động từ diễn tả các phuờng tiện vận chuyển được hoạch định trong tuơng lai cũng thường được dùng ở thì hiện tại tiếp diễn; ví dự. fly (đáp máy bay), walk (đi bộ), ride (cuỡi xe đạp), drive (lái xe), take (đi bằng xe buýt, taxi, v.v ...). Sometimes a speaker will use the present pro­ gressive w hen he or she wants to make a very strong statement about a future activity, as in (k). Đôi khi người nói thuờng dùng thì hiện tại tiếp diễn khi nguời dó muốn dưa ra một câu nói rất mạnh mẽ về một hoạt động tương lai, như trong (k).

* A future meaning for the present progressive is indicated either by future time words in the sentence or by the context.

Nghĩa tương lai cho thì hiện tại tiếp diễn được chỉ ra hoặc bằng các từ thời gian tương lai trong câu hoặc bằng ngữ cảnh.

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 71

3. A: I _____________________ on vacation tomorrow. B: W here____________ y o u ____________ ? A: To San Francisco. B: How are you getting there? ____________ you _____________________ or

____________________your car? A: I _____________________ . I have to be at the airport by seven tomorrow morning. B: Do you need a ride to the airport? A: No, thanks. I ____________ a taxi. Are you planning to go somewhere over vacation? B: No. I _____________________ here. 4. A: My sister and her husband_______________ ______ over to my house for dinner tom orrow night. It's my sister's birthday, so I ______________________ a special

birthday dinner for her. I _______________ ______ her favorite food: roast beef and mashed potatoes. B: ____________ anyone else_____________________over for the birthday dinner? A: Yes. Rick and Olga Walker. 5. A: I’m going to call the doctor. You have a fever, chills, and a stomach ache. B: No, don't call a doctor. I'll be okay. A: I'm worried. I _____________________ the doctor! And that's it!

3-8 USING THE SIMPLE PRESENT TO EXPRESS FUTURE TIME DÙNG THÌ HIỆN TẠI ĐƠN Đ Ể DIỄN TẢ THỜI GIAN TƯƠNG LAI (a ) My plane arrives at 7:35 tomorrow evenmg. (b) Tom's new job starts next week. (c) The semester ends m two more weeks. (d) There is a meeting at ten tomorrow morning.

The simple present can express future time w hen events are on a definite schedule or tim e­ table. Only a few verbs are used in the simple present to express future time. The m ost com ­ m on are arrive, leave, start, begin, end, finish, open, close, be. Thì hiện tại đơn có thể diễn tả thời gian tương lai khi các sự việc có thời biểu rõ ràng. Chỉ có vài động từ được dùng ở thì hiện tại đơn để diễn tả thời gian tương lai. Các động từ thông dụng nhất là arrive (đến), leave {ra đì), start (bắt đầu), begin tbắt đầu), end (kết thúc),finừh (kết thúc),open {khai mạc, mở), close (đóngì, be (thì, là).

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 73

□ EXERCISE 2 0 - ORAL: M ake sentences th a t com m unicate th e sam e or a sim ilar m eaning. U se th e verbs in parentheses. 1. I think that I will graduate next June, (hope)

-> / am hopờigỊhope to graduate next June. 2. 3. 4. 5.

I think that I will be at the meeting on time tomorrow. (intend) Tom thinks that he will buy a new red bicycle tomoưow. (plan) Jane thinks that she is going to get a good job after she graduates, (hope) I think I will stay in London for two weeks after I leave Paris, (plan)

6. I think I will finish my education, g et a good job, start a family, and live happily ever after.

(intend)

3-10 IMMEDIATE FUTURE: USING BE ABO U T TO TƯƠNG LAI GẦN NHẦT: DÙNG BE ABO U T TO (a) Ann's bags are packed and she The idiom be about to do something expresses an is wearing her coat. She is activity that will happen in the immediate future, usually within five minutes. In (a): Ann is going to about to leave for the airport. leave sometime in the next few minutes. (b) Shhh. The movie ừ about to Đặc ngữ be about to do something (sáp lòm việc gồ diễn tả một hoạt động sẽ xảy ra trong tương lai gần begin. nhất,thường trong vòng năm phút. Trong (a): Ann sắp ra đi một lúc nào đó trong vài phút tới.

□ EXERCISE 21 - ORAL: W hat are th e following people probably ab o u t to do? 1. Jack is holding his camera to his eye. He has his finger on the button. He's about to take a picture. 2. Sally has her hand on the door knob. 3. Ben is putting on his coat and heading for the door. 4. Nancy has dirty hands from working in the garden. She is holding a bar of soap. She is standing at the bathroom sink. 5. Eric is on the last question of the examination. 6. Rita is holding a fly swatter and staring at a fly on the kitchen table.

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 75

CHAPTER 4

Nouns and Pronouns Danh từ và đại từ

□ EXERCISE 1 - PRETEST: Identify each italicized word in th e sentences as a: • NOUN • ADJECTIVE • PREPOSITION or

• PRONOUN. ttOttir

1. Eric is wearing a new shirt today.

shut

2. Algeria is m North Africa.

m

ũreỷosition

3. Steve is in Asia. He is traveling.

he

ừronõuK

4. I'm thirsty.

thirsty

5. We have class in this room every day.

room

6. I know my way to Joanna's house.

way

T

/ « The happy children squealed with joy.

happy

8. I walked to class with Maria.

with

9. Hawaii has eight principal islands.

ừlands

10. The hungry man stuffed his mouth with rice.

hungry

11. Tokyo is the capital of Japan.

Japan

12. Athens is a beautiful city.

beautiful

13. My history book is under my desk.

under

14. Do you like classical music?

music

15. I don't eat sour oranges. I don't like them.

them

FUNDAMENTALS

ad fectiw

OF ENGLISH GRAMMAR

- 77

(e) one tomato two tomatoes one zoo two zoos one zero two zeroes/zeros

The plural form of nouns that end in -0 is som e­ times -oes and sometimes -OS. Dạng số nhiều của các danh từ tận cùng là -0 đôi khi lầ -oes và đôi khi là -OS. -oes: tomatoes (cà chua), potatoes (khoai tây), heroes (anh hùng), echoes (tiếng vang), mosquitoes (con muỗi) -OS: zoos isở thú), radios (ra-đi-ô), studios (phòng thu hình, phòng chụp ảnh), pianos (đuơng cầm), solos (bài nhạc sô-lô), sopranos (giọng nữ cao), photos (ảnh chụp), autos (xe hơi) -oes or hoặc -os: zeroes!zeros (sốkhông), volcanoes/volcanos [tì úi ỉửì), tornadoes1tornados (cơn bão lớn)

(f) one child one foot one goose

one man one mouse one tooth one woman (g) one one one one one

deer fish sheep offspring species

(h) one bacterium

one cactus

two children two feet two geese two men two mice two teeth two women two people

Some nouns have irregular plural forms. (NOTE: The singular form of people can b e person, woman, man, child. For example, o n e m a n an d

one child = two people.) Một số danh từ có dạng số nhiều bất qui tắc. (LUU Ỹ: Dạng số' ít của people có thể là person, woman, man, child. Ví dụ: một ngUời đàn ông và một đứa trẻ = hai ngúời.)

two deer two fish two sheep two offspring two species

The plural form of some nouns is the same as

two bacteria two cacti

Some nouns that English has borrowed from other languages have foreign plurals.

one crisis two crises one phenomenon two phenomena

the singular form. Dạng số nhiều của một số danh từ giống như dạng số ít.

Một sốdanh từ mà tiếng Anh vay mượn từ các ngôn ngữ khác có dạng số nhiều là tiếng nước ngoài.

□ EXERCISE 3: Write th e plural forms of the nouns.

I.

one potato, two

2. a dormitory, many one child, two

ừotatơeg

7.

an ooinion. manv

8. a mouse, several 9. a sandwich, some

4. a leaf, a lot of

10. a man. manv

5. a wish, manv

11. one woman, two

6. one fish, two

12. a flash, three FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 79

4-3 OBJECTS OF PREPOSITIONS s

V

o

PREP

o o f PREP

(a) Ann put her books on the desk. (noun)

s

V PREP

TÂN NGỮ CỦA GIỚI TỪ

Many English sentences have preposi­ tional phrases. In (a): “on the desk” is a prepositional phrase. A prepositional phrase consists o f a PREPOSITION (PREP) and an OBjECTOPAPREPQsmoN (OofPREP).

O o f PREP

The object of a preposition is a noun. Nhiều câu tiếng Anh có cụm giới từ. Trong (a): “on the desk" là cụm giới từ. Cụm giới

(b) A leaf fell to the ground. (noun)

từ gồm một GIỜ Từ (PREP) và một TÂN NCỮ CỦA GIỚI TỪ(O ofPREF). Tân ngữ của giới từ

lầ một danh từ. REFERENCE LIST OF PREPOSITIONS BẢNG THAM KHẢO CÁC GIỚI TỪ about above across after against along among around at

before behmd below beneath beside besides between beyond by

despite down during for from in mto like near

of o ff on out over smce through throughout tã

to towardfs) under until up upon with withm without

□ EXERCISE 5:

F in d th e SUBJECTS, VERBS, a n d OBJECTS in th e follow ing. Id e n ­ tify th e PREPOSITION (PRKP) a n d th e n o u n th a t is u s e d a s th e OBJECT OF THE PREPO SITION (o o f PREP).

s 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

V

o

PREP

o

of PREP

Sara saw some pictures on the wall. Sara looked at the pictures. Emily waited for her friend at a restaurant. The sun rises in the east. Sue lost her ring in the sand at the beach. The moon usually disappears from view during the day.

7. Eric talked to his friend on th e phone for thirty minutes.

8. Children throughout the world play with dolls. 9. Astronauts walked on the moon in 1969.* 10. A woman in a blue suit sat beside me until the end of the meeting. Note: In a typical English sentence, "place" (e.g., on the moon) is mentioned before "time” (e.g., in 1969). INCORRECT: Astronauts walked in 1969 on the moon.

Luu ý: Trong câu tiếng Anh tiêu biểu, "nơi chốn" (vd: trên mặt trăng) được đề cập trước "thòi gian" (vd: vào năm ì 969). SAI: Astronauts walked in 1969 on the moon.

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 81

(f) He wore a white shirt. INCORRECT: He wore a shirt white. (g) Roses are beautiful (h) His shirt was white.

Adjectives can come immediately before nouns, as in (f). Tính từ có thể đứng ngay trước danh từ, như trong (f). Adjectives can also follow main verb be, as in (g) and (h). Tính từ cũng có thể theo sau động từ chính be, như trong (g) và (h).

□ EXERCISE 7: Find the ADJECTIVES (ADJ) in th e sentences. Also discuss sub­ jects, verbs, and objects. Adj. 1. The students wrote long compositions. 2. Deserts are dry. 3. The audience laughed at the funny joke. 4. Sensible people w ear comfortable shoes.

5. Knives are sharp,

6. Crocodiles have big teeth. 7. Dark places frighten small children. 8. Steve Gleaned the shelves of the refrigerator with soapy water. 9. The local police searched the stolen car for illegal drugs. 10. Before the development of agriculture, primitive people gathered wild plants for food.

4-5 USING NOUNS AS ADJECTIVES DÙNG DANH TỪ LÀM TÍNH TỪ (a) I have a flower garden. (b)The shoe store also sells socks. (c)

Sometimes words that are usually used as nouns are used as adjectives. For example, flower is usu­ ally a noun, b ut in (a) it is used as an adjective to INCORRECT; a flowers garden modify garden. When a noun is used as an adjective,

INCORRECT: the shoes store

it is singular in form , NOT plural.

Đôi khi các từ thường được dùng như danh từ được đùng làm tính từ. Ví dụ, flower (hoa) thường là danh từ, nhưng trong (a) nó được đùng làm tính từ để bổ nghĩa garden {mùn). Khi danh từ được dùng làm tính từ, nó ở dạng số ít, KHÔNG ở dạng số n hiều FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 83

□

(1)

EXERCISE 10: F in d th e n o u n s. M a k e th e m p lu ra l i f n e cessary .

\^hálé look like fish, but they aren't. They are mammal. Mouse, tiger,

(2) and human being are other examples of mammal. Whale are intelligent (3) animal like dog and chimpanzee. Even though they live in sea, ocean, and (4) river, whale are not fish. Fish lay egg and do not feed their offspring. (5) Mammal give birth to live offspring and feed them. (6)

There are many kind of whale. Most whale are huge creature. The

(7) largest whale are called blue whale. They can grow to 100 foot (30 meter) in (8) length and can weigh 150 ton (135,000 kilogram). Blue whale are much (9) larger than elephant and larger than any of the now extinct dinosaur. The

RELATIVE SIZ ES OF A BLUE WHALE AND AN AFRICAN ELEPHANT

(10) heart of ah adult blue whale is about the size of a compact car. Its main (11) blood vessel, the aorta, is large enough for a person to crawl through. (12)

Human being have hunted and killed whale since ancient times. Aside

(13) from people, whale have no natural enemy. Today many people are trying to (14) stop the hunting of whale.

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR

SINGULAR PRONOUNS: PLURAL PRONOUNS:

I we

me us

you you

(g) M ike is in class. He is taking a test. (h) The students are in class. They are taking a test. ( i ) Kate and Tom are married. They have two children.

sh e, h e , it th e y

h e r , h im th e m

Smgular = one. Plural = more than one. Singu­ lar pronouns refer to singular nouns, plural p ro n o u n s to plural noun s. In (g): "M ike” is sin­ gular (one person), so a singular p ro n o u n [he)

is used. In (h): “students” is plural, so a plural pronoun {they) is used. Số ít = một. Số nhiều = hơn một. Đại từ số ít đề cập đến danh từ số ít, đại từ số nhiều đề cập đến danh từ số nhiều. Trong (g): “Mike” là số ít (một người), vì vậy dùng đại từ số ít (he). Trong (h): "students" lầ số nhiều, vì vậy dùng đại từ số nhiều ithey).

□ EXERCISE 11: Choose the correct words in italics. 1. Ms. Lee wrote a note on my test paper.(she^Her

wanted to talk to I, (me) after class.

2. Nick ate dinner with I, me. 3. Nick ate dinner with Betsy and I, me. 4. I, me had dinner with Nick last night. 5. Betsy and I, me had dinner with Nick last night. 6. Nick ate dinner with

we, US.

7i Nick ate dinner with the Robertsons and 8. My

we, us.

brother drove Emily and I, me to the store. He didn't come in.

He waited for we, us in the car.

We, Us hurried.

9. A: I want to get tickets for the soccer game. B: You'd better get

it, them right way. It, They is, are selling fast.

10. Alex bought a ticket to the soccer game. H e put it, them in his pocket and forgot about

it, them. The next day, he put his shirt in the wash. The ticket came out of the washing machine and dryer crumpled and nearly illegible. But when Alex took it, them to the game, the ticket taker accepted

It, them and let Alex in.

11. Please take th ese food scraps and give

it, them to th e dog.

12.1 talked to Jennifer and Mike. I told they, them about the surprise birthday party for Lizzy. They, them won't tel! she, her about it, them. She, H er is really going to be surprised!

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 87

4. daughters

We have two children, both girls. They share a bedroom. Our ___________________ bedroom is next to ours.

5. man

Keith is a __________

______name.

6. woman

Heidi is a __________

_____ name.

7. men

Keith and Jeremy are _

__ _____________ names.

8. women

Emily and Colette are

names.

9. people

It's important to be sensitive to o th e r____

___________ feelings.

I always look straight into a ______________

eyes during a conversa-

10. person

tion. 11. earth

T h e ___________ _ surface is about seventy per cent water.

12. elephant

A n _____________________skin is gray and wrinkled. We have class in this building, but all of th e_______________

13. teachers

offices

are in another building. 14. teacher

My grammar

15. enemy

Two soldiers, each faceless and nameless to the other, fought to the death on

husband is an engineer.

the muddy river bank. At the end, the winner could not help but admire his _____________________courage and wonder why he'd had to die. 16. enemies

Through the years in public office, he made many political enemies. He made a list of h is____________________ names so that he could get re­ venge when he achieved political power.

4-8 POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS AND ADJECTIVES ĐẠI TỪ VÀ TÍNH TỪ s ở HŨU This pen belongs to me. (a) It's mine. (b) It is my pen.

(a) a n d (b) have th e sam e m eaning; they b o th show possession. “M ine" is a possessive p ro n o u n ; “m y” is a possessive adjective.

(a) và (b) có cùng nghĩa; cả hai đều chỉ quyền sỏ hũu. “Mine” là đại từ sở hũu; “my” là tính từ sở hũu.

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 89

4-9 A FRIEND OF + POSSESSIVE A FRIEND OF + TỪ s ở HỮU (a) Do you know Greg Smith? He is a friend o f mine.*

A friend o f + a possessive nomlpronoun is a special or idiom atic expression. It is used to identify another

(b)We ate dinner with a friend o f Bill's. INCORRECT: a friend o f Bill

person as one friend among many friends.

(c)

A friend o f + danh từ/ đại từ sở hữu là một thành ngữ đặc biệt hoặc một thành ngữ đặc ngữ. Nó được dùng để xác nhận một người khác là một người bạn trong số nhiều The Smiths are friends o f người bạn.

mine.

In (a): a friend, o f mừie = one of my friends, but n ot my only friend. In (b): a friend o f Bill's = one of Bill's friends; Bill has other friends. In (c): The expression

can also be used in the plural. Trong (a): a friendofm m e = một trong những người bạn của tôi, nhưng không phải là người bạn duy nhất của tôi. Trong (b): a friend o f Bill's = một trong những người bạn của Bill; Bill có những người bạn khác. Trong (c): Thành ngữ này cũng có thể được dùng ở dạng số nhiều. * He ừ my friend may give the idea that the

He is my friend có thể nêu ý là người nói có chỉ

speaker has only one friend. A speaker would

một người bạn. Người nói thường nói He ừ one of

normally say He is one of my friends or He ừ a friend of mine.

my friends hoặc He ừ a friend of mine,

□ EXERCISE 14 - ORAL (BOOKS CLOSED):

M a k e se n te n c e s w ith a friend o f I

friends of. Exam pk: You have a friend (in Chicago). You wrote a letter to this person. Response: I wrote a letter to a friend of mine in Chicago. Example: ( . . . ) has a friend (in Miami). He wrote a letter to this person. Response: Pedro wrote a letter to a friend of his in Miami. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

6. 7. 8.

( . . . ) has a friend in (a city). He/She wrote a letter to this person. You have a good friend in (a city). You wrote a letter to this person. ( . . . ) and ( . . . ) have friends in (a city). They visited them. You have a good friend. You want to introduce me to this person. You and I have a mutual friend. We ran into this person at (name o f a place). ( . . . ) has a good friend. You met this person. You have a friend. You invited this person to spend the weekend with your family. ( . . . ) and ( . . . ) have some friends. They usually have dinner with these people.

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 91

SPYROS: I am looking at myself in the mirror. TEACHER: Tell Spyros what he is doing. STUDENT B: Spyros, you are looking at yourself in the mirror. Example: ( . . . ) and ( . . . ) hold the mirror and look into it. TEACHER: What are (Min Sok) and (Ivonne) doing? Etc.

□ EXERCISE 16: C o m p le te th e se n te n c e s w ith reflex iv e p ro n o u n s. 1. Are you okay, Heidi? Did you hurt

ỷõurs& ểệ

?

2. David was really embaưassed when he had to go to the job interview with a bandage on his face. He had c u t_____________________ while he was shaving. 3. Do you ever talk to ___________________ ? Most people talk to ___________________ sometimes. 4. It is important for all of us to have confidence in our own abilities. We need tò believe in 5. Sara is self-employed. She doesn't have a boss. She works fo r_____________________ . 6. Steve, who is on the wrestling team, w ishes_____________________good luck before each match. 7. There's plenty of food on the table. Would all of you please simply help_______________ to the food? 8. Brian, don't blame_____________________ for the accident. It wasn't your fault. You did everything you could to avoid it. 9. I couldn't believe my good luck! I had to pinch_____________________ to make sure I wasn't dreaming. 10. A newborn puppy can't take care o f _____________________ . 11. I know Nicole and Paul have had some bad luck, but it's time for them to stop feeling sorry fo r_____________________ and get on,with their lives. 12. Jane and I ran into som eone sh e knew. I'd never m et this person before. I waited for Jane

to introduce me, but she forgot her manners. I finally introduced__________________ to Jane's friend. FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 93

THE OTHER

(b) There are two apples on the table. Paul is go­ ing to eat one of them. Sara is going to eat the other apple.

The other means "the last one in a specific group, the only one that re­ m ains from a given num ber of similar items." The other nghĩa là "cái/người cuối cùng trong một nhóm cụ thể, cái/người duy nhất còn lại từ một số các thứ tương tự đuợc n ê u {cái/

người kia/còn ỉạií (c) Paul ate one apple. Then he ate another apple. (d) Paul ate one apple. Then he ate another onẹ. (e) Paul ate one apple. Then he ate another.

Another and the other can be used as an adjective in front of a noun (e.g., apple) o r in front o f th e w ord one. Another và the other có thể được dùng làm tính từ truớc danh từ (vd:

apple) hoặc trước từ one. (f) Paul ate one apple. Sara ate the other apple, (g) Paul ate one apple. Sara ate the other one. (h) Paul ate one apple. Sara ate the other.

Another and the other can also be used alone as a pronoun, as in (e) and (h). Another và the other cũng có thể được dùng một mình làm đại từ, như

trong (e) và (h).

□ EXERCISE 18: C om plete th e

se n te n c e s w ith anoứier or the other.

1. T here are many kinds of animals in th e world. T he elephant is one kind. The tiger is

CLKotker-

2. There are two colors on this page. One is white._____T ’/i'C other

is black.

3. Alex's bicycle was run over by a truck and destroyed. He needs to get one. 4. The Smiths have two bicycles. One belongs to Mr. Smith._____________________bike belongs to Mrs. Smith. FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 95

Other(s) (without the) m eans “several more out of a group of similar items, several in addi­ tion to the one(s) I've already talked about.” Otheris) (không có the) nghĩa là "nhiều (cái/người) nữa từ một nhóm các thứ tifcjng tự, nhiều (cái/người) ngoài (những) cái/người tôi đã nói đến rồi." (khác)

There are many apples in Paul's kitchen. Paul is holding one apple. (a) There are oứier apples in a bowl. (adjective + noun) (b) There are other ones on a plate. (adjective + ones) (c) There are others on a chaứ. (pronoun)

The adjective other (without an -s) can be used with a plural noun (e.g., apples) or with the word ones. Others (with an -s) is a plural p r o ­ n o u n ; it is not used with a noun. Tính từ other (không có -ĩ) có thể được dùng với danh từ số nhiều (vd: apples) hoặc với từ ones. Others (với -s) là đạ! từ số nhiều; nó không được dùng với danh từ (những (cái/ngM) khác). In (c): others = other apples. Trong (c): others = other apples. TH E OTHER(S)

0 Ịk apples

l i

'1

There are four apples on the table. Paul is going to take one of them. (d) Sara is going to take the oơier apples. (adjective + noun) (e) She is going to take the other ones. (adjective + ones) (f) She is going to take the others. (pronoun)

ì'

m

The other{s) m eans “die last ones in a specific group, th e rem ain s from a given n u m b er of

similar items.” The other(s) nghĩa là "nhữhg cái/người cuối cùng trong một nhóm cụ thể, những cái/người còn lại từ một số c ác thứ tương tự được nêu."

(cái/ngM kia/còn lạù. The other (without an -s) can be used as an ad­ jective in front of a noun or the word ones, as in (d) and (e). The other (không có -s) có thể được dùng làm tính từ trước danh từ hoặc từ ones, như trong (d)

và (e). The others (with an -s) is a plural p ro n o u n ; it is not used with a noun. The otíiers (với -s) là đại từ số nhiều; nó không được dùng với danh từ.

In (f): the others = the other apples. Trong (f): the others = the other apples. FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 97

4-13 SUMMARY OF FORMS OF OTHER TÓM TẮT CÁC DẠNG CỦA OTHER SINGULAR PLURAL

ADJECTIVE another apple other apples

PRONOUN another others

SINGULAR PLURAL

the other apple the other apples

the other the others

N otice th a t th e w ord others [other+ final -5) is used only as a plural p ronoun. Luu ý là từ others (other + đuôi -s) chỉ được dùng làm đại từ sế nhiều.

□ EXERCISE 20: Complete the sentences with correct forms of other, another, other, oứiers, the other, the oơiers. 1. Jake has only two suits, a blue one and a gray one. His wife wants him to buy

QJiotker

one. 2. Jake has two suits. One is blue, a n d _____________________ is gray. 3. Some suits are blue._____________________ are gray. 4. Some suits have two buttons._____________________ suits have three buttons. 5. Our physical education class was divided into two groups. Half of the students stayed inside and played basketball.______________________ students went outside and played soccer. 6. If you really hate your job, why don't you look fo r_____________________ one? You don’t have to be a dishwasher all your life. There are lots o f_____________________ jobs in the world. 7. An automobile consists of many parts. The motor is one, and the steering wheel is _____________________ . _____________________ parts are the brakes, the trunk, and the fuel tank. 8. Some people keep dogs as p e ts.__________________ _____________ have cats. Still ._______________________ people have fish or birds as pets. Can you name

_____________________ kinds of animals that people keep for pets? 9. When I was a kid, I had two pets. One was a black dog._____________________ was an orange cat.

10. When I walked into the classroom on the first day, the room was empty. I sat down at a desk and wondered if I was in the right room. Soon_____________________ student came and took a seat. Then a fe w _______ _____________ followed, and the room slowly began to fill. FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 99

4-14 CAPITALIZATION

VIỆC VIỀT HOA

CAPITALIZE: VIẾT HOA:

Capitalize = use a big letter, n ot a small letter.

1. The first word of a sen­ (a) W e saw a movie last tence night. It was very good. Từ đầu tiên của câu

Capitaỉừe = dùng mẫu tự lớn, chứ không phải mẫu tự

nhỏ (viết hoa)

2. The nam es of people Tên người

(b) I met George Adams yesterday.

3. Titles used with die nam es of people

(c) I saw Doctor (Dr.) Smith. COMPARE: so SẢNH: Do you know Professor (Prof.) Alston? I saw a doctor. Tôi đã gặp một bác sĩ. I saw Doctor Wilson. Tôi đã gặp Bác sĩ Wilson.

Các chức danh được

dùng với tên ngúời

4. Months tháng, days ngày, holidays ngày nghỉ

(d) I was bom in April. Bob arrived last Monday. It snowed on Thanks­ giving Day.

NOTE: Seasons are n o t ca ­ pitalized: spring, summer,

fall/autumn, winter l.uu Ý: Không viết hoa các

mùa: spring (xuân), summer (hạ), fã u /autumn (thu), wmter (đông) 5. The nam es of places: Tên các nơi: City thành phô' state/province tiểu bang/tỉnh country quốc gia continent đại lục

ocean đại dittng lake hồ river sông desert sa mạc m ountain núi

(e) He lives in Chicago. She was bom in Califor­ nia. They are from Mexico. Tibet is in Asia.

They crossed the Atlan­ tic Ocean. Chicago is on Lake Michigan. The Nile River flows north. The Sahara D esert is in Africa. We visited the Rocky Mountains.

FUNDAMENTALS

COMPARE:

so sánh: She lives in a city. Co ấy sống ờ một thành phố. She lives in New York City. Cô ấy sống ở Thành p h ố New York. COMPARE: so SÂNH: They crossed a river.

Họ đã vượt qua một con sông. They crossed the Yellow River. Họ đã vượt qua Sông Yel­ low.

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 101

□ EXERCISE 22: Add capital letters where necessary.

w

T

1. yfe're going to have a test nex t^esd ay . 2. do you know richard smith? he is a professor at this university. 3. i know that professor smith teaches atthe university of arizona. 4. the nile river flows into th e m editerranean sea.

5. john is a catholic, ali is a moslem. 6. anna speaks french, she studied in france for two years. 7. i'm taking a history course this semester.

8. i'm taking modem european history 101 this semester. 9. we w ent to Vancouver, british Columbia, for our vacation last sum m er. 10. Venezuela is a spanish-speaking country.

11. Canada is in north america.* 12. canada is north of the united states. 13. the sun rises in the east. 14. the mississippi river flows south.

□ EXERCISE 23: Add capital letters where necessary. 1. We don't have class on Saturday. 2. I'm

taking biology 101 this semester.

3. I'm

taking history, biology, english, and calculus

this semester.

4. We

went to a zoo. We went to brookfield zoo in

chicago.

5. I live on a busy street. I live at 2358 olive street. 6. We went to canada last summer. We went to montreal in july. 7. I like Vietnamese food. 8. The religion of saudi arabia is islam. 9. She works for the xerox corporation. It is a very large corporation. 10. Pedro is from latin america. 11! My uncle lives in St. louis. I'm going to visit uncle bill next spring. 12. On valentine's day (February 14), sweethearts give each other presents. * When north, south, east, and west refer to the direction on a compass, they are not capitalized: T _______■ ____ J. Japan ừ east of China.

When they are part of aa egeographical - ~ 6 . name, they are capitalized. Japan is in the Far East.

Khi north, south, east, và west đề cập đến phương hướng trên la bàn, chúng không được •if'. I_____ T _________ __________A. . í / 1 » ___ viết hoa: Japan is east of China. Khi chúng .là a Imột IIV 1 p phần i I I I I . vcủa -u u U địa . I . .................. danh, >chúng được viết hoa: Japan is in the Far East.

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 103

CHAPTER

5

Modal Auxiliaries Trợ động từ khuyết 5-1 THE FORM OF MODAL AUXILIARIES DẠNG CỦA CÁC TRỢ ĐỘNG TỪ KHUYỀT The verbs in the list below are called modal auxiliaries. They are helping verbs that ex­ press a wide range of meanings (ability, permission, possibility, necessity, etc.). Most of the modals have more than one meaning. Các động từ trong bảng kê dưới đây được gọi là trợ dộng từ khuyết. Chúng là các trợ động từ diễn tả rất nhiều nghĩa (khả năng, sựcho phép, việc có thể xảy rạ, sự cần thiết, v .v ...). Hầu hết

các động từ khuyết có hơn một nghĩa. AUXILIARY + THE SIMPLE FORM OF Can, could, may, might, should, had better, must, A VERB will, and would are followed by the simple form of a verb. can I can speak English. (a) could (b) He couldn't come to Can (có thể - hiện tại), could (có thể - quá khứ), may (có lẽ - hiện tại, tương lai khá chắc chắn), might (có ỉẽ class. hiện tại, tương lai không chẩc chăn), should {nên), may (c) It may rain tomor­ had better (tốt hơn ... nên), must {phải), will (sẽ - tương row. might (d) It might rain tomor­ lai), và would, (sẽ - tương lai trong quá khú hoặc dùng trong câu yêu cầu lịch sự). Tất cả các động từ khuyết row. này được theo sau bởi dạng đơn của động từ. should (e) Mary should study They are not followed by to: harder. To không theo sau chúng: had (f) I had better study better tonight. CORRECT: I can speak Engtish. must (g) Joe must see a doctor ĐÚNG: I can speak Englừh. today. INCORRECT: I can to speak Englừh. will 00 I will be in class to­ SAI: I can to speak English. morrow. The m ain verb never has a final -s. would (i) Would you please Động từ chính không bao giờ có đuôi -s. close the door? CORRECT: Olga can speak English. ĐÚNG: Olga can speak Engtish. INCORRECT: Olga can speaks Engỉừh. SAI: Olga can speaks Englừh. FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 105

5-2 EXPRESSING ABILITY: CAN AND COULD DIỄN TẢ KHẢ NĂNG: CANVk COULD (a) Bob can play the piano.* (b) You can buy a screwdriver at a hardware store.

Can expresses ability in the pres­ ent or future. Can (có thể) diễn tả khả năng ỗ hiện tại hoặc tương lai.

(c) I

The negative form of can may be written: can% cannot, or cannot. Dạng phủ định của can có thể được viết: can % cannot, hoặc can not.

can't i cannot 1 understand that sentence. can not 1

(d) Our son could talk when he was two years old.

(e) They

couị^n ^

The past form of can is could. Dạng quá khứ của can là could. The negative of could: couldn't or could not. Phủ định của could: couldn’t hoặc

Ị

come to class yesterday.

could not. * Notice:

Lull ý:

CORRECT: Bob can play the piano. INCORRECT: Bob can to play the piano. INCORRECT: Bob can plays the piano.

ĐÚNG: Bob can play the piano. SAI: Bob can to play the piano. SAI: Bob can plays the piano.

□ EXERCISE 2: Complete th e sentences with can and can't. 1. A cat

QdK

climb trees, but it

CdK V

fly.

2. A fish ____________ walk, but i t ____________ swim. 3. A d o g ____________bark, but i t ____________ sing. 4. You____________ buy stamps at the post office, but you_____________ buy shoes there. 5. A tiny baby____________ cry, but i t ____________ talk. 6. I ____________write with a pen, but I ____________ write with a paper clip. 7. I ______ _____ read a book by moonlight, but I ____________ read in sunlight. 8. T re e s____________produce oxygen, but ro ck s____________ . 9. F ish ____________live in air, but th e y ____________ live in water. 10. You____________store water in a glass jar, but y ou____________ store it in a paper bag. 11. You____________drive from the Philippines to Australia, but you_____________ drive from Italy to Austria.

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 107

□ EXERCISE 4 - ORAL (BOOKS CLOSED): U se could. 1. What could you do when you were a child that you can't do now? 2. What could you do when you were living in your own country or hometown that you can't do now? 3. What did you want to do yesterday or last week but couldn't do? Why couldn't you do it? 4. Who has missed class recently? When? Why? 5. Who has had a cold or the flu recently? What couldn't you do when you were sick?

5-3 EXPRESSING POSSIBILITY: M A Y A N D M IGHT EXPRESSING PERMISSION: M AYAND CAN DIỀN TẢ V IỆC CÓ TH Ể XẢY RA: M A Y VÀ MIGHT DIỄN TẢ SỰXIN PHÉP: M A Y V k CAN (a) It may rain tomcKTOW. (b) It might rain tomorrow. (c) A: Why isn't John in class? B: I don't know. He Ị

Ị be sick today.

M ay and might express possibiỉừy in die present or future. They have the same meaning. There is no dif­ ference in m eaning between (a) and (b). M ay và might (cổ lẽ) diễn tả việc có th ể xảy ra ở hiện tại hoặc tương lai. Chúng có cùng nghĩa. Không có sự khác nhau về nghĩa giữa (a) và (b).

(d) It may not rain tomorrow. (e) It might not ram tomorrow.

Negative: m ay not and might not. (Do not contract may and might with not.) Phủ định: may not và might not. (Không rút gọn may và might với not.)

(f) Maybe it will rain tomorcow. (g) Maybe John is sick. (h) John may be sick.

Maybe (spelled as one word) is an adverb m eaning “perhaps.” Notice (0 and (g). Maybe (được viết một tù) là một trạng từ nghĩa lầ “perhaps” (= có lẽ). Lưu ý (0 và (g). M ay be (spelled as two words) is a verb form, as in (h): the auxiliary may + the m ain verb be. M ay be (được viết hai tù) là dạng động từ, như trong (h): trợ động từ may + động từ chính be.

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 109

2. It's midnight. Your roommate/spouse isn't home. Where is he/she? 3. ( . . . ) wants to buy a sandwich. The sandwich costs (a certain amount o f money). ( . . . ) has only (a lesser amount o f money) in her/his pocket. What is she/he going to do? 4. Your friends are coming to your homẹ for dinner. What are you going to make (i.e., cook) for them? 5. You want to go on a picnic tomorrow, but the weather forecaster predicts rain for tomor­ row. What are you going to do if you can't go on a picnic? 6. It is late at night. You hear a strange noise. What is it? 7. What is your (younger sister/younger brother/daughter/son/niece/nephew) going to be when she or he grows up? 8. Look at the picture. What is the man's occupation? What is the woman's occupation?

5-4 U SIN G COULD TO EXPRESS POSSIBILITY DÙNG COULD Đ Ể DIỄN TẢ V IỆC c ó TH Ể XẢY RA (a) A: Why isn’t Greg in class? B: I don't know. He could be sick. (b) Look at those dark clouds. It could start raining any minute.

Could can m ean past ability (see Chart 5-2). But that is not its only meaning. Another m eaning of could is possibility. Could có thể có nghĩa khả năng quá khứ {xem Bảng 5-2). Nhưng đó không phải là nghĩa duy nhất của nó. Nghĩa khác của could là việc có th ể xảy ra. In (a): “He couldbe sick” has the same m ean­ ing as "He may /might be sick,” i.e., “It is possi­ ble that he is sick.” Trong (a): "He could be sick” có cùng nghĩa như "He mayỊmight be sick”, nghĩa là "Có thể là anh ấy bệnh." In (a), could expresses a p r e s e n t possibility. Trong (a), could diễn tả một việc có thể xảy ra ở hiện tại. In (b), could expresses a fu tu re possibility. Trong (b), could diễn tả một việc có thể xảy ra ở tương lai.

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 111

□ E X ER C ISE 8: Following are som e phone conversations. Com plete th e dia­ logues. U se may I, could I, or can I + a verb from th e list. Note: T h e caller is SPEAKER B.

help 1.

leave

speak/talk

take

A: Hello? B: Hello. Is Dick there? A: Yes, he is. B: _____________________________to him? A: Just a minute. I'll get him.

2.

A: Hello. Dean Black's office. B: ______________________ to Dean Black? A: May I ask who is calling? B: Susan Abbott. A: Just a moment, Ms. Abbott. I'll connect you.

3.

A: Hello? B: Hi. This is Bob._____________________ to Steve? A: Sure. Hang on.

4.

A: Good afternoon. Dr. Anderson's office._____________________ you? B: Yes. I'd like to make an appointment with Dr. Anderson. A: Fine. Is Friday morning at ten all right? B: Yes. Thank you. A: Your name?

5.

A: Hello? B: H ello.___________________to

Emily?

A: She's not at home right now ._____________________ a message? B: No thanks. I'll call later. 6.

A: Hello? B: H ello.___________________to

Mary?

A: She's not here right now. B: O h ._____________________ a message? A: Certainly. Just a minute. I have

to get a pen.

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 113

5-6 ASKING FOR ASSISTANCE: WOULD YOU , COULD YOU, W ILL YOU , CAN YOU YÊU CẦU GIÚP ĐỠ: WOULD YOU, COULD YOU , WILL YOU, CAN YOU POLITE QUESTION (a) Would you please open the door? (b) Could you please open the door? (c) Will you please open the door? (d) Can you please open the door?

POSSIBLE ANSWERS* People use would you, could you, will you, and can you to ask polite questions. The questions ask for someone's help or cooperation. Người ta dùng would you, could you, will you, và can you để hỏi các câu hỏi lịch sự. Các câu hỏi này yêu cầu sự giúp đỡ hoặc hợp tác của người nào đó.

Yes. Yes. Of course. Yes. Certainly. Of course. Certainly. I'd be happy to. I'd be glad to. Of course. I'd be happy/ glad to. Certainly. I'd be happy/ glad to. Sure. (informal) Okay. (informal) My pleasure, (informal) Uh-huh. (meaning “yes”)

(a), (b), (c), and (d) have basically the same meaning. The use of can, as in (d), is less formal than die others, (a), (b), (c), và (d) cơ bản có cùng nghĩa. Cách dùng can, như trong (d), ít trang trọng hơn các cách dùng khác. NOTE: M ay is NOT used w hen you is th e subject o f a polite question. LUU Ý: M ay KHÔNG được dùng khi

you là chủ ngữ của câu hỏi lịch sự. INCORRECT: M ay you please open the

door? SAI: M ay you please open the door? * Answers to polite questions are usually affirmative. Examples of possible polite negative responses follow:

Các câu trả lời cho các câu hỏi lịch sự thường là dạng khẳng định. Các ví dụ về các câu trả lời lịch sự ở dặng phủ định có thể có như sau:

I'm sorry, but (I can't, I don't have enough time, my arms are full, etc.). I ’d like to, but (I can’t, I don't have enough time, my arms are full, etc.). □ EXERCISE 10: C om plete th e dialogues. U se a polite question w ith would you/could you/will you/can you in each. U se th e expressions in th e list or your own words. answer the phone for me get the door fo r me open the wmdow pick some up

say that again turn it down turn the volume up

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 115

7.

PERSONA: Hi.

PERSON B: Hi. Walabaxitinpundoozit? PERSON A: Excuse m e ?___________ PERSON B: Walabaxitinpundoozit. PERSON A: I'm sorry, but I don't understand.

□

EXERCISE 11 - ORAL (BOOKS CLOSED): A sk a classm ate a polite q u e s ­

tion.

Example: You want someone to open the door. STUDENT A: ( . . . ) , would/could/will/can you please open the door?

STUDENT B: CertainlyySurevTd be happy W etc. STUDENT A: Thank you/Thanks. You want someone to . .. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

close the door. lend you his/her eraser. tell you the time. hand you (somethmg). shut the window.

6. lend you a quarter. 7. help you. 8. spell (a particular word) for you. 9. hold your books for a minute. 10. give (.something) to ( . . . )■

11. ( . . . ) is at your apartment. The phone is ringing, but your hands are full. You want him/her to answer it for you. 12. You and ( . . . ) are on vacation together. You'd like to have a picture of the two of you to­ gether. You see a stranger who looks friendly. You want her to take a picture of you. 13. You wrote a letter to a university. You want your teacher to read it and correct the mis­ takes. 14. ( . . . ) is going to the library. You want him/her to return a book for you. 15. ( . . . ) and you are at (name o f a nearby restaurant). You want ( . . . ) to lend you (a cer­ tain amount o f money).

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 117

1.

If you are tired, you

Iĩkou.ểdn t

driữ-ữữ. êonỷdìstữ.i(6e>,

2. Cigarette smoking is dangerous to your health. Y ou_______ 3. Agooddriver_______________________________________ 4. A teacher_________________________________________ 5. A student_________________________________________ 6. Animals have feelings, too. You _ 7. It is important to be punctual. You 8. Littering is against the law. You _

□ EXERCISE 13: Com plete th e dialogues. U se should, ought to, or had better. Choose from th e expressions in th e list or use your own words. borrow some money call the landlord and complain call the police drink a glass o f water . find a new apartment find a new girlfriend get a job go back to the restaurant and ask if someone found them hold your breath

marry somebody who ừ rich put cotton m your ears see a dentist send her a dozen roses soak it m cold water speak Englừh outside o f class every đay take it back to the store use a dictionary when he writes watch T V a lot

1. A I have a toothache. This tooth hurts. What should I do?* B

skou.ểdl'ouỵkt toỊkadầett&r- SM a d&ítist.

2. A I have the hiccups. What should I do? B

* Should, not ought to or had better, is usually used in a question. The answer, however, can contain should, ought to, or had better, as in the example answer in number one.

Should, chứ không phẳi ought to hoặc had bet­ ter, thường được dùng trong câu hỏi. Tuy nhiên, câu trả lời có thể có should, ought to hoặc had better, như trong câu (rả lời ví dụ trong số một.

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 119

5-8 EXPRESSING NECESSITY: HAVE TO, HAVE GOT TO, MUST DIỄN TẢ SỰCẪN THIỀT: HAVE TO, HAVE GOT TO, MUST (a) I have a very important test tomorrow. have to I have got to study tonight. must

Have to, have got to, and must have basi­ cally the same meaning. They express the idea that something is necessary. Have to, have got to, và must cơ bản có cùng nghĩa. Chúng diễn tả ý là điều gì đó là cần thiết, (phải) Have to is used m uch more frequently than must in everyday speech and writ­ ing* Have to được dùng thường xuyên hơn must trong lời nói và văn viết hàng ngày. Have got to is generally used only in infor­ m al speech a n d writing.

Have got to thường chỉ được dùng trong iời nói và văn viết thân mật. (b) I have to (“hafta”) go downtown today. (c) Rita has to (“hasta”) go to the bank. (d) I've got to (“gotta”) study tonight.

Usual pronunciahave to = “hafta” tìon: has to = “hasta” Cách phát âm (have) got to = “gotta" thông thường:

(e) I had to study last night.

The past form of have to, have got to, and must (meaning necessity) is had to. Dạng quá khứ của have to, have got to, và must (nghĩa sự cần thiết) là had to.

* Must means that something is very necessary; there is no other choice. Must is used much less frequently than have to in everyday speech and writing. Must is a “strong" word.

Must nghĩa là điều gì đó là rất cần thiết; không có sự chọn lựa khác. Must được dùng ít thường xuyên hơn have to trong lời nói và văn viết hàng ngày. Must là từ "mạnh".

□ EXERCISE 15: Com plete th e sentences. U se have to, has to, or had to in each. 1. I went downtown yesterday because _ 2. I can't go to the movie tonight because_____________ 3. I couldn't go to Pete's party last Saturday because____ 4. Josh can't go downtown with us this afternoon because 5. When I was in high school,_______________________ 6. If you want to travel abroad,_________________ ‘ FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 121

5-9 EXPRESSING LACK OF NECESSITY: DO NOT HA VE TO EXPRESSING PROHIBITION: MUST NOT DIỄN TẢ S ự KHỔNG CẨN THIỀT: DO NOT HAVE TO DIỄN TẢ S ự CẦM ĐOÁN: MUST NOT (a) I finished all of my homework this after­ noon. I don't have to study tonight. (b) Tomorrow is a holiday. Mary doesn't have to go to class.

Don't!doesn't have to expresses the idea that something is not necessary. Don't/doesn't have to diễn tả ỷ lằ điều gì đó không cần thiết. (không cần)

(c) Children, you mast not play with matches! Must not expresses prohibition. (DO NOT (d) We must not me that door. The sign says: DO THIS!) PRIVATE: DO NOT ENTER. M ust not diễn tả sự cấm đoản. (ĐỪNG LÀM ĐIỀU NÀY!) (không đuọc) (e) You m ustn't play with matches.

M ust + not = mustn't. (Note: The first “t" is not pronounced.) M ust + n o t=m ustn’t. (Luu ý: Không phát âm “t ” đầu tiên.)

□ EXERCISE 17: C om plete th e sentences w ith don'tjdoesn't have to or must not. 1. The soup is too hot. You 2. You

doK t kau-eto

m a.st n o t

eat it yet. Wait for it tơ cool.

have soup for lunch. You can have a sandwich if you like.

3. Liz finally got a car, so now she usually drives to work. She_____________________ take the bus. 4. Tommy, y o u _____________________ say that word. That's not a nice word. 5. Mr. Moneybags is very rich. H e _____________________ work for a living. 6. If you are in a canoe, you_____________________ stand up and walk around. If you do, the canoe will probably tip over.

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 123

5-10 MAKING LOGICAL CONCLUSIONS: MUST ĐƯA RA CÁC K Ề T LUẬN HỢP LÝ: (a) A: Nancy is yawning.

MUST

In (a): SPEAKERB is making a logical guess. He bases his guess on die information that Nancy is yawning. His logical con­ clusion, his “best guess,” is that Nancy is sleepy. He uses must to express his logi­ cal conclusion.

B: She must be sleepy.

Trong (a): NGUỠI NÓI B đang đưa ra lời đoán hợp lý. Người đó dựa vào lời đoán của mình trên thông tin là N ancy đang ngáp. Kết luận hợp lý của người đó, "lời đoán tốt nhất" của người đổ là N ancy buồn ngủ. Nguời đó dùng must đ ể diễn tả két luận hợp lý của mình, (chắc là,hẳn lù) (b) LOGICAL CONCLUSION: Amy plays tennis

every day. She must like to play tennis. (c) NECESSITY: If you want to get into the movie theater, you must buy a ticket.

COMPARE: M ust can express: so SÁNH: M ust có thể diễn tả: • a logical conclusion, as in (b).

một kết luận hợp lý, như trong (b). (chắc là, hẳn là) • necessity, as in (c). sự cần thiết, như trong (c). (phải)

(d) NEGATIVE LOGICAL CONCLUSION: Eric ate everything on his plate except the pickle. He must not like pickles. (e) PROHIBITION: There are sharks in the ocean near our hotel. We must not go swimming there.

COMPARE: M ust not c an express: so SÁNH: M ust not có thể diễn tả: • a negative logical conclusion, as in (d).

một kết luận hợp lý phủ định, như trong (d) (chắc là ... khôngị. • prohibition, as in (e). sự cấm đoán, như trong (e).

□ EXERCISE 18: M ake logical conclusions. U se must or must not. 1. Tim has been working in the hot sun for the last hour. He just drank one glass of water. Right now he is refilling his glass, {thirsty?) —»Tim

m a s t è e t h i r s t ỷ . _________________________________________ _________

2. I am at Eric's apartment door. I've knocked on the door and have rung the doorbell several times. Nobody has answ ered the door, (at home?) ->Eric

m u s t n o t ie- a t home. ________________________________________

'FUNDAMENTALS o f

ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 125

up and flies over a hard surface such as a paved road or sidewalk. From this height, it drops the shellfish so that the shell will crack open. After that, it flies down to claim its dinner. (smart birds?) —>Crows

5-11 GIVING INSTRUCTIONS: IMPERATIVE SENTENCES ĐƯA RA CÁC CHỈ THỊ: CÁC CÂU MỆNH LỆNH COMMAND (a) General: Soldier:

Open th e d o o r! Yes, sir!

Imperative sentences are used to give commands, make polite requests, and give directions.

Open th e d o o r, p le a se . Okay, I'd be happy to.

Các câu mệnh lệnh được dùng để đưa ra các mệnh lệnh, các câu yêu cầu lịch sự, và hướng dẫn.

REQUEST

(b)

Teacher: Student:

DIRECTIONS (c) Barbara: Could you tell me how to get to the post office? Stranger: Certainly. W alk tw o b lo ck s d o w n th is stre e t. Turn left a n d w alk th r e e m o r e blocks. It's on the right hand side of the street.

The difference between a com ­ m and and a request lies in the speaker's tone of voice and the use of please. Sự khác nhau giữa câu mệnh lệnh và câu yêu cầu nằm ở giọng của người nói vầ cách dùng please.

Please can come at the begin­ ning or end of a request: Please có thể đứng đầu hoặc cuối của lời yêu cầu:

Open the door, please. Please open the doer.

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 127

□ EXERCISE 2 0 - ORAL: Use imperative sentences. 1. Using an imperative sentence, tell another classm ate to perform som e action in the class­ room. (STUDENT A to B: Write your name on the board. [STUDENT B writes on the board.] STUDENT B to C: Change desks. [STUDENT c changes desks.] STUDENT c to D: etc.)

2. Using an imperative sentence, tel! a classmate either what to do or what NOT to do in class­ room. (STUDENT A to B: D on't interrupt while another student is speakmg. STUDENT B to C: Raise your hand if you want to speak. STUDENT c to D: etc.) 3. Tell your listeners what to do in their daily lives to help preserve the earth's environment and natural resources. (Recycle aluminum cans. Walk mstead o f driving y o w car— etc.) 4. Direct a classmate whose eyes are closed (or who is blindfolded) from one spot in the room to another. Make sure your classmate doesn't bump into any tables or chairs or other peo­ ple! (Take two steps straight ahead. Now turn to your left and take one step— etc.) 5. Give a classmate explicit directions on how to get to a place that is near the classroom building. Don't name the place. Let your classmate figure out which place you are thinking about from listening to yoiir directions. (Go out the main door. Turn left and . . . etc.)

□ EXERCISE 21 - WRITTEN: Write about one of the following. 1. Give general advice to people who want to (choose one)'. a. improve their health.

e. find a job.

b. get good grades.

f. live life fully every day.

c. improve their English. d. make a good first impression.

g. get married.

Tell your readers: Do this. Don't do that. You should do this. You shouldn't do that. You ought to do this. You have to do this. You don't have to do that. You must do this. You must not do that. You can do this. You had better do that, etc. 2. One of your friends wants to come to this city. He/She wants to go to school here or get a job here. Write your friend a letter. Give your friend advice about coming to this city to study or work. 3. Explain how to get a date for Saturday night.

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 129

5. A: 1 need to go shopping. B: So do I. B: I can't go then.______ _________ ________ A: Okay. That's fine with me. A: Do you have any plans for this weekend? B: Not really. A: I don't either.________________________ B: Okay. Good idea, 7. A: What time should we leave for the airport? B : ________________________

.

A: Okay. 8. A: What should we do tonight? B:

_______________________

A: Sounds okay to me. 9. A : _______________ B: Let's n o t.____________________________________________ _________ instead. A: Okay.

□ EXERCISE 23 - ORAL: Give suggestions. Use “Why don't you 1. 2. 3. 4. 9. 10. 11.

I'm thirsty. 5. It's too hot in this room. I'm sleepy. 6. Brrr. I'm cold. I have ạ headache. 7. I'm broke. I have a toothache. 8. I'm hungry. I have to take a science course next semester. What should I take? Tomoưow is my sister's birthday. What should I give her? I'd like to go to (.. .)'s party tonight, but I should probably stay home and study. What do you think I should do? 12. I'm going to take a vacation this summer. Where should I go? □ EXERCISE 2 4 : M ake sentences b y com bining one o f th e ideas in C olum n A with one of the ideas in Column B. Use if with th e ideas in Column A.* Example: I f you need some help whenyoumove into your new apartment, please callme. * Use the simple present in the "if-dause." (See Chart 3-2.) Do not use may in the "if-clause."

Dùng thì hiện tai đơn trong "mệnh dề if” (Xem Bảng 3-2). Không dùng mạy trong "mệnh đề if”

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 131

(e) Ann would rather have an apple than (have) an orange. (f) I'd rather vừit a big city than live there.

In (e) and (f): would rather and than are followed immediately by the simple form of a verb (e.g., have, w it, live).* Trong (e) và (f): would rather và than được theo sau ngay bởi dạng đơn của động từ (vd: have, visit, live).

(g) I'd/You ’dJShe 'd/He 'dl We 'dJThey 'd rather have an apple.

Contraction of would = 'd. Dạng rút gọn của would = 'd

(h) Would you rather have an apple or an orange?

In (h): In a polite question, would rather can b e followed by o r to offer so m eo n e a

choice. Trong (h): Trong câu hỏi lịch sự, or có thể theo sau would rather để cho người nào đó một chọn lựa. * INCORRECT: Ann would rather has an apple. INCORRECT:I'd rather visit a big city than to live

SAI: Ann would rather has an apple. SAI: I'drather visit a big city than to live there,

there. INCORRECT. I'd rather visit a big city than living

SAI: I'd rather vừit a big city than living there,

there.

□ EXERCISE 25: Complete the sentences with than or to. 1. When I'm hot and thirsty, I p r e f e r cold drinks

to

2. When I'm hot and thirsty, I lik e cold drinks b e tte r 3. When I'm hot and thirsty, I'd r a t h e r h a v e a cold drink

hot drinks. th a n ____ hot drinks. tka.n

a hot drink.

4. 1 p r e f e r chicken____________ beef. 5. I lik e chicken b e t t e r ___________ beef. 6. I'd r a th e r eat chicken____________ beef. 7. When I choose a book, I p r e f e r nonfiction____________fiction. 8. I lik e rock 'n roll b e t t e r ____________ classical music. 9. Tina w o u ld r a th e r lie on the beach____________ g o swimming. 10. Tina lik e s ly in g on the beach b e t t e r ___________ g o in g swimming.

11. Tina p re fe rs ly in g on the beach___________ g o in g swimming. 12. My parents w o u ld r a th e r w o r k ____________r e tir e . They enjoy their jobs. 13. Do you lik e fresh vegetables b e t t e r ____________frozen or canned vegetables? 14. I w o u ld r a th e r ta k e a picture of a wild animal_____________ kill it with a gun. 15. Mr. Kim p re f e r s te a ____________ coffee with his evening meal. 16. I p r e f e r v is itin g my friends in the evening_____________ w a tc h in g TV by myself. 17. My brother w o u ld r a th e r r e a d a book in the evening___________ v is it with friends. 18. My sister lik e s her math class b e t t e r ______________________ her biology class. FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 133

5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.

go to Moscow or (go) to London for your vacation? visit Niagara Falls or (visit) the Grand Canyon? take a nap or go downtown this afternoon? watch TV or read a good book? study chemistry or (study) accounting? be a plumber or (be) a carpenter? go to a football game or (go) to a soccer game?

12. take a long walk this afternoon o r go swimming?

13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20.

after dinner, wash the dishes or dry the dishes? go to (name o f a place m thừ city) or go to (name o f a place m thừ city)? have straight hair or (have) curly hair? be a student or (be) a teacher? have six children or (have) two children? take your vacation in Greece or (take your vacation) in Brazil? have a car or (have) an airplane? be a bird or (be) a fish?

□ EXERCISE 28: Complete th e dialogues with your own words. 1.

A: Do you feel like going to a show tonight?

2.

A: Which do vou like better,

3.

A: What are you going to do this weekend?

4.

A: What kind of music do you like?

5.

A: What are you going to do tonight?

6.

A: Let's go on a picnic next Saturday.

7.

A: I like

B: Not really. I'd rather or

B: I like

better

B: Imav

.but I'd rather

B: All kinds. But I prefer

to

B: I should

, but I'd rather

B: That sounds good, but I'd rather better

B: Oh? Why? A: 8.

A: Are you going to

tonight?

B: I'd like to, but I can't. I have to

, but I'd much rather

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 135

CHAPTER 0

Asking Questions Ho/ các câu hoi 11-2’

_ ^

I_ _? *

6-1 YES/NO QUESTIONS A ND SHORT ANSWERS CÂU HỎI Y E S /N O VÀ CÂU TRẢ LỜI NGẮN YES/NO QUESTIONS (a) Do you know Jim Smith? (b) Did it rain last night? (c) Are you studying English? (d) Was A n n in class? (e) Will Rob be here soon? (f) Can you swim?

SHORT ANSWER (+ LONG ANSWER)

A yesjno question is a question that can be Yes, I do. (I know Jim Smith.) answered by “yes” or No, I don't. (I don't know Jim Smith.) "no” (or their equiva­ Yes, it did. (It rained last night.) lents, such as “yeah” No, it didn't. (It didn't rain last night.) or “nah,” and “uh huh" or “huh uh"). Yes, I am .* (I'm studying English.) No, I'm not. (I'm not studying English.) Cảu hỏi yesỊno là câu hỏi có thể được trả lời Yes, she was. (Ann was in class.) với “yes” hoặc "no” No, she wasn't. (Ann wasn't in class.) (hoăc các tương đuởng của chúng là “yeah" Yes, he w ill.* (Rob will be here soon.) No, he w on't. (Rob won't be here soon.) hoặc "nah,” và ‘‘uh h u h ” hoặc “h u h u h ”). Yes, I can. (I can swim.) No, I can't. (I can’t swim.)

In an affirm ative a n sw e r (.yes), a h e lp in g verb is not contracted with the subject. In (c): CORRECT: Yes, I am. (The spoken emphasis is on am.) INCORRECT: Yes, I'm.

* NOTE:

In (e): CORRECT: Yes, he will. (The spoken emphasis is on will.) INCORRECT: Yes. he'll.

LLXj Ý: Trong câu trả lời khẳng định (yes), động từ trợ giúp không được rút gọn với chủ ngữ. Trong (c): ĐÚNG: Yes, I am. (Trong vãn nói nhấn mạnh am.) SAI: Yes,I'm. Trong (e): ĐÚNG: Yes, he will. (Trong văn nói nhấn mạnh will.) SAI: Yes, he’ll.

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 137

16. A: B: Yes,

(You should make an appointment to see the doctor.)

17. A: B: Yes,

(You need to make an appointment to see the doctor.)

18. A.: B: Yes,

(I have a bicycle.)*

19. A: B: No,

(Greg doesn't have a roommate.)

20. A: B: Y es,_____________________ (I have to study tonight.)

□ EXERCISE 2 - ORAL (BOOKS CLOSED): A nsw er th e questions. Use short answers. Example: Do you know how to swim? Response: Yes, I do. OR: No, I don't. Example: Is ( . . . ) wearing blue jeans today? Response: Yes, s/he is. OR: No, s/he isn't. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

Is ( . . . ) in class today? Does ( . . . ) have a mustache? Is ( . . . ) wearing a sweater today? Was ( . . . ) in class yesterday? Did ( . . . ) come to class yesterday? Is ( . . . ) from (name o f a country)? Does ( . . . ) speak (name o f a language)? Are you going downtown tomorcow? Will you be in class tomorrow? Can you play the piano? Do you know how to play the violin? Are we going to have a test tomorrow?

* In American English, a form of do is usually used when have is the main verb:

Do you have a car? In British English, a form of do with main verb have is not necessary:

Have you a car?

13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20.

Can turtles swim? Should people smoke cigarettes? Did you watch TV last night? Do you have a bicycle? Will class begin at {time) tomoưovv? Does class begin at (tune) every day? Do giraffes eat meat? Were all of the students in class yes­ terday? 21. Should I speak more slowly? 22. Is English grammar easy? 23. Was this exercise difficult? Trong tiếng Anh của Mỹ, người ta thường dùng một dạng của do: Do you have a car? Trong tiếng Anh của Anh, một dạng của do với động từ chính have không cần thiet: Have you a car?

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 139

(QUESTION WORD)

HELPING SUB­ VERB JECT

MAIN VERB

(REST OF SENTENCE)

(a) (b) Where

Does does

A nn A nn

live live?

(c)

Is

(d) Where

is

Sara Sara

studying at the library? studying?

(e) (f) When

Will will

you you

graduate next year? graduate?

they they

see

Did (g) (h) Who(m)* did (i)

(j) Where

Is is

in Montreal?

HELPING VERB + SUBJECT + MAIN VERB TRỢ ĐỘNG Từ + CHÚ NCỮ + ĐỘNG Từ CHÍNH

Jack?

In (i) and (j): Main verb be in sim ple p resen t and s ta p le past (am, is, are, was, were)

at home?

precedes the subject. It has die same position as a help­ ing verb. Trong (i) và (j): Độngtừchính be ở hiện tại đơn và quá khứ đơn (am, ừ, are, was, were)

see?

Heidi Heidi?

The same subject-verb word order is used in both yes/no and information questions: Dùng cùng trật tự từ chủ ngữ động từ trong cả câu hỏi yes/no và câu hỏi thông tin:

đi trước chủ ngữ. Nó có cùng

vị trí như động từ trợ giúp. (k) (1)

Who What

came to dinner? happened yesterday?

*See Chart 6-3 for a discussion of who(m).

When the question word (e.g., who or what) is the subject of the question, the usual question word order is not used. No form of do is used. Notice (k) and (]). Khi từ hỏi (vd: who hoặc what) là chủ ngữ của câu hỏi, không dùng trật tự từ của câu hỏi thông thường. Không dùng dạng do. LúU ý (k) và (I).

Xem Bảng 6-3 bàn về who(m).

□ EXERCISE 4 - ORAL: M ake questions from th e following sentences. M ake (a) a YES/NO QUESTION and (b) an INFORMATION QUESTION w ith where. Example: I live there. Response: (a) Do you live there? (b) Where do you live? 1. She lives there. 2. The students live there. 3. Bob lived there.

4.- I'm living there. 5. Mary is living there. 6. I was living there. FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 141

12. A: B: In Japan. (I was living in Japan in 1988.) 13. A: ______________________________________________________ B: Because they're working on an exercise. (The students are writing in their books be­ cause they're working on an exercise.) 14. A: _____________________________________________________________________ B: Around seven. (You should call me around seven.) 15. A: ___________________________________ _________________________________ B: Because she's flying her kite in the park. (Yoko is absent because she's flying her kite in the park.)

□ EXERCISE 6: Make information questions. Use where, why, when, what time, or w h a t 1. A: ______________________________________ ______________________________ B: Tomorrow. (I’m going to go downtown tomorrow.) 2. A: _____________________________________________________________________ B: Because I didn't feel good. (I stayed home yesterday because I didn't feel good.) 3. A: _______________________ _____________________________________________ B: To a moviẹ. (I went to a movie last night.) 4. A: _____________________________________________________________________ B: At a hardware store. (You can buy a hammer at a hardware store.) 5. A: ________________________ ____________________________________________ B: At 1:10. (Class begins at 1:10.) 6. A: ______________________ _____________________________________________ B: Because I need to buy some stamps. (I have to go to the post office because I need to 7. A:

buy some stamps.) •__________________________________________________________ _

B: Next June. (My daughter will graduate from college next June.) 8. A: __________________________________________________________________ B: At Lincoln Elementary School. (My children go to school at Lincoln Elementary School.) 9. A: _____________________________________________________________________ B: Four years ago. (I m et the Smiths four years ago.) 10. A: __________________________________ B: “Try.” (“Attempt” means “try.”) FUNDAMENTALS O F E N G L IS H G R A M M A R

- 143

Exampừ: A: I didn't study last night. B: Why didn't you study last night? (Notice: Use a negative verb m die question with why.) A: Recause I was tired. 7. A: I didn't do my homework last night. 8. A: I'm not coming to class tomorrow 9. A: I can't come to your party thisweekend. 10. A: I didn't eat breakfast this morning. 11. A: I won't be in class tomorrow. 12. A: I don't like the weather in this city.

6-3 U SIN G WHO, WHO(M), AND WHAT DÙNG WHO, WHO(M), VÀ WHAT QUESTION

ANSWER

(a) Who came?

o

Someone came.

s

s

o

(b) W ho(m ) did you see? I saw someone.

In (a): Who is used as the subject (S) of a question. Trong (a): Who được dùng làm chủ ngữ (S) của câu hỏi. In (b): W ho(m) is used as die object (O) in a question. Trong (b): W ho(m ) được dùng làm tân ngữ (O) trong câu hỏi. Whom is used in formal English. In everyday spoken English, who is

usually used instead of whom: Whom đuợc dùng trong tiếng Anh trang trọng. Trong tiếng Anh nói hàng ngày, thường dùng who thay cho whom: FORMAL Whom did you see? TRANG TRỌNG: Whom did you see? INFORMAL: Who did you seeĨ THẰN MẬT: Who did you see?

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 145

5. A: _________ ____________ B: Mary. (Mary saw John.) 6. A: B: An accident. (An accident happened.) 7. A : ________________________________ B: A new coat. (Alice bought a new coat.) 8. A; B: Alice. (Alice bought a new coat.) 9. A : _________________________ B: A map of the world. (I'm looking at a map of the world.)* 10. A:

___

____ _________ ______________________

B: Jane. (I'm looking at Jane.) 11. A: B: The secretary. (I talked to the secretary.) 12. A:

___

__

___

____

B: His problems. (Tom talked about his problems.) 13. A: '________________________________________ B: The board. (The teacher looked at the board.) 14. A: B: The teacher. (The teacher looked at the board.) 15. A : __________________________________________ B: The students. (The teacher looked at the students.)

* A preposition may come at the beginning of a question in very formal English: At what are you looking? A t whom (NOT who) are you looking?

Giới từ có thể đứng đầu câu hỏi trongtiếng Anh rất trang Irọng:

In everyday English, a preposition usually does not come at the beginning of a question.

Trong tiếng Anh thường ngày, giới từ thường không dứng đầu câu hoi.

A t what are you looking? A t whom (NOT who) are you looking?

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 147

6-4 USIN G

W HAT +

A FORM OF D O DÙNG W H A T + MỘT DẠNG CỦA D O

What + a form o f do is used to ask questions about activities. (Examples of forms of do: am domg, will do, are going to do, did, etc.) W hat + một dạng của do được dùng để hỏi các câu hỏi về các hoạt động. (Các ví dụ về các dạng của do: am doing, will đo, are gomg to đo, did, v.v ...) ANSWER

QUESTION

(a) What does Bob do every morning?------------------— > He goes to class. (b) What did you do yesterday?------------------------- — > I went downtown. (c) What ừ your roommate doing? ---------------------- -----> S he's studying. (d) What are you going to do tom orrow?--------------— > I'm going to go to the beach. (e) What do you want to do tonight? ------------------ ---- > I want to go to a movie. (f) What would you like to do tomorrow?----- ------- ---- > I would like to visit Jun. (g) What will you do tomorrow? ------------------------ ---- > Til go downtown. (h) What should I do about my headache? ------------ — > You should take an aspừin.

□ EXERCISE 11: M ake questions. U se what + a form of do. 1. A

w h a t a r c you doÍKậ'

right now?

B: I'm studying. last night?

2. A: B: I studied.

tomorrow?

3. A: B: I'm going to visit my relatives.

tomorrow?

4. A: B: I want to go to the beach.

tomorrow?

5. A: B: I need to go to the library.

tomorrow?

6. A: B: I would like to go to a movie.

tomorrow?

7. A: B: I'm planning to stay home and relax most of the day.

in class everyday?

8. A: B: I Study English. FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAMMAR - 149

□ EXERCISE 12 - ORAL (BOOKS CLOSED): A sk a classm ate a question. U se what + do. Example: tomctfTow STUDENT A: What are you going to do tomorrow?/What do you want to do tomorrow?/What would you like to do tomoưow?/etc. STUDENT B: (Answer the question.) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16.

last night right now next Saturday this afternoon tonight yesterday every day yesterday afternoon

6-5

this morning last weekend on weekends tomorrow afternoon after class yesterday after class today every morning the day after tomorrow

U S IN G W H A T K I N D O F

QUESTION

(a) What kind o f shoes did you buy?

(b) What kind o f fruit do you like best?

ANSWER Boots. Sandals. Tennis shoes. Loafers. Running shoes. High heels, (etc.) Apples. Bananas. Oranges. Grapefruit. Grapes. Strawberries. (etc.)

DÙNG W H A T K I N D O F W hat kind o f asks for information about a specific type (a specific kind) in a general category. W hat kind o f hỏi thông tin về một loại cụ thể (a specific kind) trong một loại chung. In (a): Trong (a): general category = shoes giày loại chung specific kinds = boots giày ôhg các loại cụ thể sanđals giày săn-đan, tennis shoes giày đánh tennis, etc. v.v...

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 151

10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15.

Who had soup yesterday/for lunch today? What kind of soup did you have? Who has a TV? A VCR? What kind? What kind of government does your country have? What kind of job would you like to have? What kind of person would you like to marry? What kind of products can we recycle?

6-6

U S IN G W H I C H

DÙNG W H I C H

(a) Tom: May I borrow a pen from you? Arm: Sure. I have two pens. This pen has black ink. That pen has red ink. Which (pen/one) do you w ant? Tom: That one. Thanks. (b) Which pen do you want? (c) Which one do you want? (d) Which do you want?

In (a): Ann uses which (not what) be­ cause she wants Tom to choose. Trong (a): Ann dùng which (chứ không phải what) vì cô ấy muốn Tom chọn lựa. Which is used when the speaker wants someone to make a choice, when the speaker is offering alternatives: this one or that one-, these or those. Dùng which khi người nói muốn nguời nào đó chpn lựa, khi người nói đang đưa

ra các chọn lựa: thừ one or that one; these or those. (b), (c),and (d) have the same meaning. (b),(c),và (d) có cùng nghĩa. (e) Sue:

I like these earrings, and I like those earrings. Bob: Which (earrings/ones) are you go­ ing to buy? Sue: I think I'll get these. (f) Which earrings are you going to buy? (g) Which ones are you going to buy? (h) Which are you going to buy?

□

Which can be used with either singular or plural nouns. Có thể dùng which hoặc với danh từ số ít hoặc danh từ số nhiều. (f),(g),and (h) have the same meaning. (f), (g), và (h) có cùng nghĩa.

EXERCISE 15: M ake questions. Use which or what. 1. A: I have two books.

k / k i c k éoo£ / ỊẠÍkick one’ / W h ic h do you. woLnt?

B: That one. (I want that book.) 2. A:

h / k a t didỷũu. é tiỷ w k cn ỷQu. (ơe/(Ế skoppinỷ?__________________

B: A book. (I bought a book when I went shopping.) 3. A: Could I boưow your pen for a minute? B: Sure. I have tw o .___________

________________

A: That one. (I would like that one.) FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 153

6-7 USIN G

DÙNG W H O SE

W H O SE ANSWER

QUESTION (a) Whose (book) is this? (b) Whose {books) are those?

It's John's (book). They're mine (OR: my books). I borrowed Karen's (car).

(c) Whose car did you borrow?

Who's and whose have the same pronunciation. Who's và whose có cùng cách phát âm.

COMPARE:

(d) Who's that? (e) Whose is that?

Whose asks about possession. Notice in (a): the speaker of the question may omit the noun {book) if the meaning is clear to die listener. Whose hỏi về quyền sở hũli. LuU ý trong (a): người nói câu hỏi này có thể bỏ danh từ (book) nếu nghĩa rõ ràng với người nghe.

Mary Smith. Mary's.

Who's= a contraction of who is. Who's = dạng rút gọn của who is. Whose= asks aboutpossession.* Whose = hỏi về quyền sở hũu. * See Charts 4-7 and 4-8 for ways of expressing possession.

Xem Bảng 4-7 và 4-8 về các cách diễn lả quyền sở hũu.

□ EXERCISE 16: M ake questions w ith whose or who. T h e tilings n ear S u san b e­ long to her. T he th in g s n ea r Eric belong to him .

SUSAN

1. A: ______

k/koge, ầOíSÌ^tểdêêis

this?

B: Susan's. (It's Susan's basketball.) 2. A: __________ b/ko

is________

this?

B: Susan. (This is Susan.) . that?

3. A: ________ ____________ B: Eric's. (It's Eric's notebook.) 4. A; ________________________

. these?

B: Eric's. (They're Eric's tapes.) FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 155

Example: (Student A points to some books.) STUDENT A: Whose (books) are those? STUDENT B: They're Kim's (books).

□ EXERCISE 18 - ORAL: A sk an d answ er questions about possession. Follow th e p attern in th e exam ples. T alk ab o u t th in g s in th e classroom. Example: STUDENT A: STUDENT B: STUDENT A: STUDENT B:

pen Is this your pen?/Is this (pen) yours? N0i it isn't. Whose is it? It’s All's.

Example: STUDENT A: STUDENT B: STUDENT A: STUDENT B:

pens Are these Yoke's (pens)?/Are these (pens) Yoko's? No, they aren't. Whose are they? They're mine.

1. 2. 3. 4.

dictionary books notebook papers

5. 6. 7. 8.

bookbag briefcase glasses backpack

9. 10. 11. 12.

purse calculator things stuff*

□ EXERCISE 19 - WRITTEN: M ake questions for th e given aiiswers. U se any appropriate question word. W rite both th e question (A:) an d th e answ er (B:). U se your own paper. Example: A: . . . ? B:

I'm reading.

Written diahgue: A: Iạ /Iu Ì areỷOu. doi/tỷ? B: ím reaẩnỷ. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

A: A: A: A: A: A:

. . . . . .

. . . . .

7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

? B: I'm going to study. ? B: A Toyota. ? B: Mr. Miller. ? B: It's Bob’s. ? B: It means “small.”

* Stuff is used in informal spoken English to mean miscellaneous things. For example, when a speaker says, "This is my stuff," the speaker may be referring to pens, pencils,

books, papers, notebooks, clothes, etc. (Note: stuff 's a noncount noun; it never has a final -s.)

A: A: A: AAA:

. . ? B: Jazz. . . ? B: Because I didn't feel good. . . ? B: This one, not that one. . ? B: You should buy that shirt. . ? B: A couple of days ago. . . ? B: I would like to go to India.

Stuff được dùng trong tiếng Anh nói thân mật nghĩa là các thứ linh tinh. Ví dụ, khi một người nói, “This is my stuff," có thể người nói đang đề

cập dến các bút mực, bút chì, sách, giấy, vở, quần áo, v.v ... (Lưu ý: stuff là danh từ không dếm dược; nó không bao giờ có đuôi -s.)

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 157

8.

A: B: It's 29,028 feet high. (Mt. Everest is 29,028 feet high.)*

9.

A : _______________________________________________________________ B: I'm starving! When's dinner? (I'm very hungry.)

10. A: ________________________________________________________________ B: I walked. (I walked to school today.) 11. A: ________________________________________________________________ B: By express mail. (You should send that letter by express mail.) 12. A: ________________________________________________________________ B: It's not very safe at all. (That neighborhood isn't very safe at night.) 13. A: ________________________________________________________________ B: Not very. (The test wasn't very difficult.) 14. A: __________________________________________________________ _ B: About 5% feet. (Mary is about 5 Vá feet tall.)** 15. A: ________________________________________________________ ________ B: Not very fast. Usually about 55 miles per hour. (I don't drive very fast.)***

6-9

U S IN G HOW OFTEN

QUESTION

DÙNG HOW OFTEN ANSWER Every day. Once a week. About twice a week. Every other day or so.* , Three times a month.

(a) How often do you go shopping?

(b) How many times a day do you eat? How m any times a week do you go shopping? How m any times a month do you go to the bank? How m any times a year do you take a vacation?

Three or four. Two. Once. Once or twice.

* Every other day means Monday yes, Tuesday no, Wednesday yes, Thursday no, etc. Or so means approximately.

How often asks about frequency. How often hỏi về tần suất.

Other ways of asking how often: Các cách kl lác hỏi how often: ' a day how many a week a month times , a year

Every other đay nghĩa là cách ngày. Or so nghĩa là đại khái như vậy.

* 29,025 feet = 5,848 meters. ** 5 Vi feet = 165 cm. *** 55 mph = 88 kilometers per hour. FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 159

(c) A: B: (d) A: B:

How fa r is it from St. Louis to Chicago? 289 miles. How fa r do you live from school? Four blocks.

(e) How m any miles is it from St. Louis to Chicago? (f) How many kilometers is it to Montreal from here? (g) How m any blocks is it to the post office?

How fa r is used to ask questions about distance. How fa r được dùng để hỏi các câu hỏi về khoảng cách. Other ways to ask how far: Các cách khác để hỏi how far: how many miles how many kilometers how many bbcks

□ EXERCISE 22: M ake questions. 1. A: B: 237 miles. (It's 237 miles from New York City to Washington, D.c.) 2. A: B: 257 kilometers. (It's 257 kilometers from Montreal to Quebec.) 3. A: B: 919 miles. (It's 919 miles to Chicago from New Orleans). 4. A: B: Six blocks. (It's six blocks to the post office.) 5. A: B: Two and a half blocks. (It's two and a half blocks to the bookstore from here.) 6. A: B: About three miles. (I live about three miles from school.) 7. A: Karen is really into physical fitness. She jogs every day. B: Oh? A: Five miles. (She jogs five miles every day.) B: That's great. I usually don't even walk five miles a day.

8. A: I had a terrible day yesterday. B: What happened? A: I ran out of gas while I was driving to work. B:

before you ran out of gas?

A: To the junction of 1-90 and 480. (I got to the junction of 1-90 and 480.) Luckily, there was a gas station about half a mile down the road.

□ EXERCISE 2 3 - ORAL: In sm all groups, look a t a m ap of y o u r area an d ask each other questions w ith how far. FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 161

(d) How many days will you be in Florida?

Ten.

Other ways of asking how long: Các cách khác hỏi how long:

how many +

mmutes hours days weeks months years

□ EXERCISE 25: M ake questions using how long.

1.

A : ______ Hou)

ểoHỹ did it ta/le ỹữu to drive to Ạ/eu) tyorfc?

B: Five days. (It took me five days to drive to New York.) 2. A: ________________________________________________________ B: Twenty minutes. (It takes me twenty minutes to walk to class.) 3. A: __________________ ;___________________________ ______________________ B: Two hours. (It took Mike two hours to finish his composition.) 4. A: _____________________________________________________________________ B: Thirty minutes. (It will take us thirty minutes to drive to the stadium.) 5. A: ___ _________________________________________________________________ B: For a week. (Mr. McNally is going to be in the hospital for a week.) 6. A: ____________________________________________________________ B: Four years. (I'll be at the University of Maryland for four years.) 7. A: _____________________________________________________________________ B: About an hour. (It takes about an hour to bake a cake.) A: How about cookies?____________________________________________________ B: Oh, it depends. Maybe thirty minutes. (It takes maybe thirty minutes to bake cook­ ies.) 8. A: _____________________________________________________________________ B: Five days. (I was out of town for five days.) A: How about Amy?_______________________________________ ______________ B: A week. (She was out of town for a week.) 9. A: ___________________________________________________________________ B: About fifteen minutes. (It takes me about fifteen minutes to change a flat tire.)

FUNDAMENTALS OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 163

9. A: B: Twenty minutes. (It takes twenty minutes to get there.) 10. A: ________________________________________________ B: One o'clock. (The game starts at one o'clock.) 11. A: _______________________________________________ __________________

B: Because I have fun. (I like to go to baseball games because I have fun.) 12. A: __________________________________________________________________

B: 1yell, enjoy the sunshine, eat peanuts, and drink beer, (I yell, enjoy the sunshine, eat peanuts, and drink beer when I go to a baseball game.)

□ EXERCISE 27 - ORAL (BOOKS CLOSED): M ake questions. Use question words. Example: I'm studying English grammar. Response: What are you doing? OR: What are you studying? 1. I studied last night.

17. I'm looking at the board.

2. I studied at the library.

18. I'm looking at ( . . . )•

3. I studied for two hours at the library last night.

20. I want this pen, not that one.

4. I'm going to study tonight.

21. ( . . . ) is wearing (kind o f shoes).

5. I'm going to study at home.

22. I'm going to wear jeans tomorrow.

6. I'm going to study with ( . . . ) •

23. I'm going to write a letter to ( . . . )•

7. We're going to study together because we have a test tomorrow.

24. ( . . . ) wrote me a letter.

19. That is ( . . . )'s pen.

8. I saw ( . . . ) yesterday.

25. It's (distance) to (name o f city) from here.

9. ( . . . ) called me last night.

26. I have a (.kind o f car).

10. I talked to ( . . . ) last night.

27. It takes (length o f tune) to drive to (name o f city) from here.

11. I go to the library twice a week. 12. The library is two blocks from here. 13. I live in (name o f thừ city).

28. I drive to (name o f city) once or twice a year. 29. “Glad” means “happy.”

14. I was born in (name o f town). 15. I grew up in (name o f town). 16. I stayed home yesterday because I didn't feel good.

30. The first oil we]] in history was drilled near Titusville, Pennsylvania, in the year 1859.

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 165

(h) How do you do?

How do you do?

How do you do? is used by both speakers when they are introduced to each other in a somewhat formal situation* How do you do? được cả hai nguời nói dùng khi họ được giới thiệu với nhau trong một tình huống khá trang trọng.

* A: Dr. Erickson, I'd like to mtroduce you to a friend of mine, Dick Brown. Dick, this ừ my biology

professor, Dr. Erickson. B: How do you do, Mr. Brown? C: How do yon do, Dr. Erickson? I'm pleased to meet you.

□ EXERCISE 28 - ORAL (BOOKS CLOSED): A sk a n o th e r s tu d e n t h o w to sp ell th e g iv en w o rd

Example: country STUDENT A: How do you spell “country”? STUDENT B: C-O-N-T-R-Y

STUDENT A: Yes, that's right. OR: No, that isn't right. The correct spelling is C-O-U-N-TR-Y.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

together purple daughter planned rained neighbor

7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

different foreign studying bought people beautiful

13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18.

beginning intelligent writing occasionally family Mississippi

□ EXERCISE 2 9 - ORAL: Ask your classmates how to say these words in theừ n a tiv e lan g u ag es:

Example: yes STUDENT A: How do you say “yes” in Japanese? STUDENT B: Hai. 1. Yes. 2. No.

3. Thank you. 4. I love you.

□ EXERCISE 3 0 - ORAL: A sk your classmates how to pronounce th ese words. Example: STUDENT A: How do you pronounce number 9? STUDENT B: (STUDENT B pronounces the word.) STUDENT A: Good. OR: No, I don't think that's right. FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 167

(e) A: I'm tired. How about you? B: Yes, I'm tired too.

How about you? and What about you? are used to ask a question that refers to the in­ formation or question that immediately preceded. In (ey.How about you? - Are you tved? In (f): What about yo u ? =Are you hun­ gry? How about you? và What about you? được dùng để hỏi câu hỏi đề cập đến thông tin hoặc câu hỏi ngay trước đó. Trong (e): How about you? = Are you tired? Trong (f): What about you? = Are you hungry?

(f) Ạ: Are you hungry? B: No. What about you? A: I'm a little hungry.

□ EXERCISE 3 2 - ORAL (BOOKS CLOSED): Respond by using how about or what about. Example: I'm looking for a good book to read. Do you have any suggestions? Response: How about (What about) Tom Sawyer by Mark Twain? It's a good book. 1. You and I are having dinner together this evening, ( . . . ) . What time should we get to­ gether? 2. I can't figure out what to give my sister for her birthday. 3. I'm hungry, but I'm not sure what I want to eat. 4. We have a whole week of vacation. Where should we go? 5. What time should I call you? 6. Where should we go for dinner tonight? 7. I've already asked ( . . . ) and ( . . . ) to my party. Who else should I ask? 8. Some friends are coming to visit me this weekend. They said they wanted to see some of the interesting places in the city. I'm wondering where I should take them.

□ EXERCISE 33: Complete the dialogues by using how about you or what about you a n d a n a p p ro p ria te re sp o n se . Example: A: What are you going to do over vacation? B: I'm staying h ere.______ li/Á aủ a io a t f ^ f o u aỉữa.t j ỷũ u .?

A: ____ i'm ỷ>0ÌKỷ to T'&ms to v-isit Mỷ sister.______ 1. A: Did you like the movie? B: It was okay, I guess.____________________________________________________ A: _____________________________________________________________________ 2. A: Are you going to summer school? B: I haven't decided yet. ___________________________________________________ A : ___________

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 169

6-15 TAG QUESTIONS

C Â U HỎI ĐUÔI

AFFIRMATIVE (a) You know Bob Wilson, (b) M ary is from Chicago, (c) Jerry can play the piano,

NEGATIVE don't you? isn'i she? can't he?

NEGATIVE (d) You don't know Jack Smith, (e) M ary isn't from New York, (f) Jerry can't speak Arabic,

AFFIRMATIVE In (a), (b), and (c): W hen the m ain verb is do you? affirmative, the tag question is negative. is she? Trong (a),(b),và (c): Khi động từ chính là can he? khẳng định,câu hỏi đuôi là phủ định.

A tag question is a question that is added on to th e en d o f a sentence. An auxiliary

verb is used in a tag question. Câu hỏi đuôi là câu hỏi được thêm vào cuối câu. Dùng trợ động từ trong câu hỏi đuôi.

In (c), (d), and (e): When the main verb is negative, die tag question is affirmative. Trong (c),(d),và (e): Khi động từ chính là phủ định,câu hỏi đuôi là khẳng định. Notice in the following: I (die speaker) use a tag question because I expect you (the lis­ tener) to agree with me. I give my idea while asking a question at the same time.* Lưu ý trong câu sau: Tôi (người nói) dùng câu hỏi đuôi vì tôi mong anh (người nghe) đồng ý với tôi. Tôi đưa ra ý kiến của tôi trong khi đồng thời hỏi câu hỏi. THE SPEAKER’S IDEA

THE SPEAKER'S QUESTION

(g) I think that you know Bob Wilson. (h) I think that you don't know Jack Smith. (i) I think that Mary is from Chicago. (j) I think that Mary isn't from New York, (k) I think that Jerry can play the piano. (1) I think that Jerry can't speak Arabic. * COMPARE:

You know Bob Wilson, don't you? You don't know Jack Smith, do you? Mary is from Chicago, isn't she? Mary isn't from New York, is she? Jerry can play the piana can't he? Jerry can't speak Arabic; can he?

A yes/no question:

SO SÁNH:

EXPECTED ANSWER Yes, I do. No, I don't. Yes, she is. No, she isn't. Yes, he can. No, he can't.

Câu hòi yes/no:

A: Do you know Bob Wilson? (The speaker

A: Do you know Bob Wilson? (Người nói

has no idea. The speaker is simply looking for information.)

không có ý kiến. Người nói chì dang tìm thông tin.) B: Yes, 1 do. HOẶC: No, I don't.

B: Yes, I do. OR: No, I don't.

A tag question:

Câu hỏi đuôi:

A: You know Bob Wilson, don't you? (The

A: You know Bob Wilson, don't you?

speaker believes that you know Bob Wil­ son. The speaker wants to make sure that hừ/her idea is correct.) B: Yes, I do. (The speaker expects you to an­ sweryes. You can, however, answer no if you do not know Bob Wilson.)

(Người nói tin là bạn biết Bob Wilson Người nói muốn nắm chắc là ý kiến của mình đúng.) B: Yes, I do. (Người nói mong bạn trả lời yes. Tuy nhiên, bạn có thề trả lời no nếu bạn không biết Bob Wilson.)

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 171

15. A: Those are your gloves,_________________________________________________ B: __________________________________________ 16. A: These are Jean's glasses,_____________________________________ _________ B: __________________________________________ 17. A: This isn't a hard exercise,_______________________________ _______________ B: __________________________________________ 18. A: That was an easy te st,_______________________________________ ___________ B : __________________________________________

□ EXERCISE 3 6 - ORAL (BOOKS CLOSED): Ask and answer tag questions. Example: You think that someone in this room lives in an apartment. STUDENT A: (All), you live in an apartment, don't you? STUDENT B: Yes, I do. OR: No, I don't. Example: You think that someone in this room lives in an apartment. STUDENT A: (All), (Maria) lives in an apartment, doesn't she? STUDENT B: Yes, she does. OR: No, she doesn't OR: I don't know. You think that someone in thừ room .. •• 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

lives in the dorm doesn't live in an apartment lives in an apartment doesn't live in the dorm was in class yesterday wasn't in class yesterday came to class yesterday didn't come to class yesterday is married isn't married

11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20.

can speak (language) is from (country) can't speak (language) isn't from (country) likes to play (name o f a sport) will be in class tomorrow can whistle knows (name o f a person) w ore blue jeans to class yesterday

has brown eyes

□ EXERCISE 37 - ORAL: Ask and answer tag questions. STUDENT A: Make a statement about a classmate by beginning a sentence with I thmk that (name of a classmate)...... STUDENT B: Change that supposition into a sentence with a tag question. STUDENT C: Answer the question. Example: STUDENT A: I think that Juan is from Venezuela. What do you think? STUDENT B: I'll ask him. Juan, you're from Venezuela, aren't you? STUDENT C: Yes, I am/Yes, that's right. OR: No, I'm not/No, what makes you think that? FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 173

CHAPTER 7

The Present Perfect and the Past Perfect Thì hiện tại hoàn thành và thì qủá khứ hoàn thành 7-1 THE PAST PARTICIPLE SIMPLE SIMPLE PAST FORM PAST PARTICIPLE REGULAR VERBS

finish stop wait

IRREGULAR see VERBS make put

finished finished stopped stopped waited waited saw made put

PH Â N T ừ Q U Á KH Ứ The p a s t p a rtic ip le is one of the principal parts of a verb. (See Chart 2-3.) Phân từ quá khứ là một trong những phần chính của một động từ. (Xem Bảng 2-3). The past participle is used in the PRESENT PERFECT ten se a n d th e PASTPERFECT tense.*

seen made put

Phân từ quá khứ được dùng ở thì HIỆN TẠI HOÀN THÀNH và thì QUÁ KHỨHOÀN THÀNH. The past participle of regular verbs is the sam e as the sim ple past form: both end in -ed. See Chart 2-4 for a list of irregular verbs. Phân từ quá khứ của động từ có qui tắc giống như dạng quá khứ đơn: cả hai đều tận cùng là -ed. Xem Bảng 2-4 về bảng động từ bất qui tắc.

*The past participle is also used in the passive. See Chapter 11.

□ EXERCISE 1: Write th e PAST PARTICIPLE. SIMPLE PAST finished saw went had met called fell did knew

PAST PARTICIPLE --- 1ệỈK Ìgked fe e * .ỉ> í t

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

SIMPLE FORM finish see go have meet call fan do know

(k ĩjĩJ.Ẳ J. d\ ■ A U & yp ■Jprva )íLỉ^Shỉrr\

10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20.

fly come study stay begin start write eat cut read be

FUNDAMENTALS

flew came studied stayed began started wrote ate cut read was/were

W'VI

\jf)\ 4

-4 ị

Íuíự''

oỊ ầ

JjM -

njLflidV.

W14/TV

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 175

7-3 MEANINGS OF TH E PRESENT PERFECT C Á C N G H ĨA C Ủ A TH Ì H IỆ N TẠI HOÀN T H À N H

aT

OJ

(a) Jim has already eaten lunch. (b) Ann hasn't eaten lunch yet. (c) Have you ever eaten at that restaurant? (d) I've never eaten there.

The present perfect ex­ presses activities or situa­ tions that occurred (or did not occur) "before now,” at some unspecified time in the past* Thì hiện tại hoàn thành diễn tả các hoạt động hoặc tình huống đã xảy ra (hoặc đã không xảy ra) "trước bây giờ," ở một thờj điểm nào đó không cụ thể trong quá khứ.

(e) Pete has eaten at that restau­ rant many times. (f) I've been to that theater five or six times. (g) I've had three tests so far this week.

The present perfect ex­ presses activities that were repeated several or many times in the past. The exact times are unspecified. Thì hiện tại hoàn thành diễn tả các hoạt động được lặp lại vài hoặc nhiều lần trong quá khứ. Số lần chính xác không được cụ thể.

(h) Erica has lived in this city since 1989. (i) I have known Ben for ten years. (j) We've been in class since ten 0 'clock this morning.

When the present perfect is used with since or for, it ex­ presses situations that began in the past and continue to the present.

c■ X ^XXK >

i----------

Khi thì hiện tại hoàn thành được dùng với since hoặc for,

nó diễn tả các tình huống đã bát đầu trong quá khứ và tiếp tục đến hiện tại. Nếu thời điểm chính xác được cụ thể, dùng thì quá khứ đơn. (Xem Bảng 7-4).

* If the exact time is specified, the simple past tense is used. (See Chart 7-4.) SPECIFIC TIME:

|im

CỤ THE:

|im

UNSPECIFIED TIME:

|im

THỜI ĐIỂM

THỜI ĐIỂM KHÔNG

C ự THỂ:

|im

ate

lu n ch a t 12.001 two hours agolyesterday.

ate lu n ch has

at

already

has alread y

12.00/two hours ago/yesterday. eaten lu n ch , ia t some unspecified timebefore now) eaten lunch, (ở một thời (liếm nàocìókhông cụ thể

trước b â y giờ.)

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 177

□ EXERCISE 4: Complete the sentences. Use the words in parentheses. Use the PRESENT PERFECT. D isc u ss th e m e a n in g o f th e p re s e n t p erfect.

1. (I, write, not)

/ ka.o-B’K t u/ritterK

my sister a letter in a long time. I should

write her soon. 2. (I, write, never)*

/ g g n e v e r uJritten

a letter to the Pi'esident of the United

States. 3. {he, finish, not)

Greg is working on his composition, b u t____________________ it yet. He'll probably finish it in a couple of hours.

4. (I, meet, never)

____________________ Nancy's parents. I hope I get the chance to meet them soon.

5. (Bon, never, be)

____________________ in Hong Kong, but he would like to go there someday.

6. (Linda, be, not)

____________________ in Idass for the last couple of days. I hope she's okay.

7. (they, come, not)

The children are la te.____________________ home from school yet. I hope nothing's wrong.

8. (we, Ịinừh, not)

___________________ _ this exercise yet.

9. (Alice, go, never)

____________________ to the Museum of Science and Industry in Chicago but she would like to.

10. (I, call, not)

____________________ Irene yet. I'll call her tomoưow.

* Never has the same usual position as other fre­ quency adverbs. (See Chart 7-8.) With the pre­ sent perfect, never comes between the helping verb (have or has) and the main verb.

Never có cùng vị trí thông thường như các trạng từ năng diễn khác. (Xem Bảng 7-8). Với thì hiện tại hoàn thành, never đứng giữa trợ động từ (have hoặc has) và động từ chính.

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 179

2. A: Have you ever eaten at Al's Steak House? B: Yes, I Ậ

. I (eat) ' \ J t

• /jjt'jt/Y )

there many times. In feet, my

wife and I (eat)______ữ ^Ắ ,ỉ__________ there last night. 3. A: Have you ever talked to Professor Alston about your grades? B: Yes, I l ĩ 9\/VjC-___________ . I (talk) ' / Ỉ grades a couple of times. In feet, I (talk)

ỉứ J ,V je Á

^

J

to him about my to him after class

yesterday about, the F I got on the last test. 4. A: What European countries (you, visit)_____________________ ? B: I (visit)_____________________ Hungary, Germany, and Switzerland. I (visit)_____________________ Hungary in 1988.1 (be)_____________________ in Germany and Switzerland in 1990. 5. A: (Bob, have, ever) _____________________ a job? B: Yes, h e ____________ . He (have)______________ ______ lots of part-time jobs. Last summer he (have)___________________ _ajob at his uncle's waterbed store.

□ EXERCISE 6: Complete the sentences with the words in parentheses. Use the PRESENT PERFECT o r th e SIMPLE PAST. U se th e p re s e n t p e rfe c t w ith already.*

1. A: Are you going to finish your work before you go to bed? B: I (finish, already)

kau-c a.ể^ea.dỷệiiùsketỉ

it. I (finish)

ệ iiù s k e d

my

work two hours ago. 2. A: Is Jim going to eat lunch with us today? B: No. He (eat, already) 'ị , (7,/N ạ ỹ f \ í 0 i ư ỉ t y . He (eat)___________ _________ lunch an hour ago.

- ^ ứ /U fjỊy y y

3. A: Do you and Erica want to go to the movie at the Bijou with us tonight? B: No thanks. We (see, already) ___________________ it. We (see)________________ it last week. 4. A: When are you going to write your paper for Dr. Roth? B: I (write, already)_____________________ it. I (write)_____________________ it two days ago.

* In informal spoken English, the simple past is often used with already. Practice using the present perfect with already in this exercise.

Trong tiếng Anh nói thân mật, already thường được dùng với thì quá khứ đơn. Luyện tập dùng thì hiện tại hoàn thành với already trong bài tập này.

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 181

□ EXERCISE 8: W rite th e SIMPLE PAST a n d th e PAST PARTICIPLES o f th e s e ir­ regular verbs. 1. see

7. drive

3. give 4. fall

&

5. take

b iữ ìc

6. shake

ỵ Ũ\ẨĂ AO Cỵ VỮH ✓ &ẤlQ/r\ f

ểJ

2. eat

_

8. ride 9. write 10. bite 11. hide

4 tư ự p y r \J Ô ẩ /

__ ũ ẩ Â ộ y i

_ W m U ______ L Ũ * _ 01

>__

UùrA

-^ ùdcU

-

□ EXERCISE 9 - ORAL: A sk a n d a n sw e r q u e stio n s u s in g th e PRESENT PERFECT in o rd e r to p ra c tic e u s in g p a s t p a rtic ip le s o f irre g u la r v erb s. STUDENT A: Ask a question beginning with “Have you ever . . . ?”

STUDENT B: Answer the question. Example: eat at the student cafeteria STUDENT A: Have you ever eaten at the student cafeteria? STUDENT B: Yes, I have. I've eaten there many times. In fact; I ate breakfast there this morning. OR: No, I haven't. I usually eat all my meals at home. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

ride a horse take a course in chemistry write a poem give the teacher an apple shake hands with ( . . . ) bite into an apple that had a worm inside

7. 8. 9. 10. 11.

drive a semi (a very large truck) eat raw fish hide money under your mattress fall down stairs see the skeleton of a dinosaur

□ EXERCISE 10: W rite th e SIMPLE PAST a n d th e PAST PARTICIPLES. 1. break

8. throw

2. speak

9. blow

3. steal

10. fly 11. drink

4. get 5. wear 6. draw

12. sing

7. grow

14. go

13. swim

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 183

7. 8. 9. 10.

leave your sunglasses at a restaurant spend one whole day doing nothing lend ( . . . ) any money sleep in a tent

11. make a birthday cake 12. build sand castles

13. win money at a racetrack 14. hang a picture on the wall

□ EXERCISE 14: W rite th e SIMPLE PAST and th e PAST PARTICIPLES. 1. sell 2. tell

9. think 10. teach

3. hear 4. hold

11. catch

5. feed 6. read

13. hit 14. quit*

7. find

15. put

12. cut

8. buy

□ EXERCISE 15 - ORAL: A sk questions beginning w ith “H ave you ever . . . ? ” an d give answers. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

teach a child to count to ten hold a newborn baby find any money on the sidewalk cut your own hair think about the meaning of life hear strange noises at night read Tom Sawyer by Mark Twain feed pigeons in the park tell a little white lie

10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15.

* Quit can be used as a regular verb in British English: quit, quitted, quitted

quit smoking buy a refrigerator sell a car hit another person with your fist put off doing your homework catch a fish

Quit có thể được dùng như động từ có qui tấc trong tiếng Anh của Anh: quit, quitted, quitted.

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 185

MAIN CLAUSE (present perfect) (f) I have lived here (g) A1 has met many people

SINCE CLAUSE (simple past) smce I was a child. smce he came here.

Since may also introduce a time clause (i.e., a subject and verb m ay foliow since). Since cũng có thể giới thiệu mệnh đề thời gian (nghĩa là, chủ ngữ và động từ có thể theo sau since). Notice in the examples: The present perfect is used in die m ain clause; the simple past is used in the "since clause." Luu ý trong các ví dụ: Thì hiện tại hoàn thành được dùng trong mệnh đề chính; thì quá khứ đơn được dùng trong "mệnh đề since."

FOR

' for ten minutes, for two hours, for five days, (h) I have been here

for about th ree weeks, for almost six months,

for many years, for a long time.

For is follcvwed by the m en­ tion of a length o f time, two minutes, three hours, four days, five weeks, etc. For được theo sau bằng việc đề cập đến khoảng thời gian: hai phút, ba giờ, bốn ngày, năm tuần, v.v ... Note: If the noun ends in -s [hows, days, weeks, etc.). use fo r in th e tim e expres­ sion, not since. Lull ý: Nếu danh từ tận cùng là -s (hours, days, weeks, v .v . ,),dùng fo r trong thành ngữ thời gian, chứ không phải since.

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 187

4. I’ve had a driver's license .............. J I for 5. I've had this book........................... / Slnce---------------------------------:------------------I fo r____________________________________ ■

p EXERCISE 18 - ORAL (BOOKS CLOSED): Answer the questions. STU­ DENT A should use since in his/her answer; STUDENT B should use for. Example: STUDENT A: To B: STUDENT B:

How long have you had this book? I've had this book sin ce (the beginning of the term). How long has ( . . . ) had this book? s/he has had this book fo r (five weeks).

1. How long have you been in (this country Icity)? 2. How long have you been at (thừ school)? 3. How long have you been up today? 4. How long have you known ( . . . ) ? 5. Where do you live? How long have you lived there? 6. How long have you had your wristwatch? 7. Who has a car/bicycle? How long have you had it? 8. How long have you been in this room today? 9. Who is wearing new clothes? What? How long have you had iựthem? 10. Who is married? How long have you been married?

□ EXERCISE 19: Add tag questions to the following and give the expected responses. (See C hart 6-14 if necessary.) 1. A: You've already seen that movie.

kav-eK tỷOu. ? ___________________________

B: ______ y& s. / hao-ù.____________________ 2. A: Alex hasn't called.

k a s h a ? __________________________________

______

B: ______ fi/o. ke* hctgK t.__________________ 3. A: You talked to Mike last night.

B:

did* tỷO tt. ? ______________________________

/ did.______________________

4. A: Jessica has already left for Kansas City,____________________________ ________ B: _______________________________________ 5. A: Steve left for Kansas City yesterday,____________________________ __________ B: _______________________________________ 6. A: You've already eaten lunch,___________________________________ __________ B : _______________________________________ FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 189

4. Since the semester (begin)

______________ , we (have)________________ four tests.

5. Mike (be)___________________in school since he (be)__________________six years old. 6. My mother (be, n o t)____________________________ in school since she (graduate) _____________________ from college in 1968. 7. Since we (.start)___________________________ doing this exercise, we (complete)_____________________ six sentences. 8. My name is Surasuk Jutukanyaprateep. I'm from Thailand. Right now I'm studying English at this school. I (be) ______________________ at this school since the begin­ ning of January. I (arrive) ________________________ here January 2, and my classes (begin)___________________ January 6. Since I (com e)__________________ here, I (d o )_____________________ many things, and I (rheet)___________________ many people. I (go)__________________ to several parties. Last Saturday I (go)________ _____________to a party at my friend's house. I (meet)_________________ some of the other students from Thailand at the party. Of course, we (.speak)___________ ____________________ Thai, so I {practice,not)______________ _______my English that night. There (b e )_______________________ only people from Thailand at the party. However, since I (com e)____________________ here, I {m eet)____________ ________________a lot of other people. I (m eet)__________________students from Latin America, Africa, the Middle East, and Asia. I enjoy meeting people from other countries.

□ EXERCISE 21 - ORAL (BOOKS CLOSED): A nsw er th e questions. (To the teacher: A sk a question that prompts the use o f the present perfect, and then únmediately follow up with a related question that prompts the use o f the simple past.) Example: Response: Teacher: Response: Teacher: etc. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

What countries have you been in? Well, I've been in England, and I've been in Mexico. Oh? When were you in England? I was in England three years ago. How about you, ( . . . ) ? What countries have you been in?

What countries have you been in? What cities (in the United States, m Florida, etc.) have you been in? What are some of the things you have done since you came to (thừ city)? Who are some of the people you have met since you came to (thừ city)? What have we studied in this class since (the begmnmg o f the term)? What have we done in class today since (nine o'clock)?

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 191

□ EXERCISE 22: C o m p le te th e se n te n c e s. U se th e PRESENT PROGRESSIVE o r th e PRESENT PERFECT PROGRESSIVE.

1. Mark isn't studying right now. He (watch) {watch)

TV. He

TV since seven o'clock.

2. Kate is standing at the com er. She (wait) (wait)

for the bus. She

for the bus for twenty minutes.

3. Right now we're in class. We (do) (do)

an exercise. We

this exercise for a couple of minutes.

4. Scott and Rebecca (talk) (talk) 5. I (sit)

on the phone right now. They on the phone for ever an hour. in class right now. I (sit)

since

ten minutes after one. 6. A: You look busy right now. What (vou, đo) B: I (work)

on mv physics experiment. It's a long and difficult

experiment. A: How long (you, w ork)_____________________ on it? B: I started planning it last January. I (.work)____________________ on it since then.

□ EXERCISE 2 3 - ORAL (BOOKS CLOSED): Answer the questions. Use since or far in your answer. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

How long have you been sitting in class? How long have you been studying English? How long have you been living in (thừ city)? Who lives in an apartment/a dormitory? How long have you been living there? I am standing up/sitting down. How long have I been standing up/sitting down? I began to teach English in (year). How long have I been teaching English? I began to work at this school in (month or year). How long have I been working here? We're doing an exercise. How long have we been doing this exercise? Who drives? How long have you been driving? Who drinks coffee? How old were you when you started to drink coffee? How long have you been drinking coffee? 11. Who smokes? When did you start? How long have you been smoking? 12. How long have you been wearing glasses?

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 193

3. Mr. Alvarez {work)_______________________ at the power company for fifteen years. He likes his job. 4. I (read)________________ i_ _ this chapter in my chemistry text three times, and I still don't understand it! 5. My eyes are getting tired. I (read)___________________

for two hours. I think I’ll take

a break. 6. Mrs. Jackson {teach)______________________kindergarten for twenty years. She's one of the best teachers at the elementary school. 7. Debbie is writing a letter to her boyfriend. She (write)_____________________ it since she got home from class. It's going to be a long letter! 8. I (write)_____________________ my folks at least a dozen letters since I left home and came here.

□ EXERCISE 25: Following is a general review of verb tenses. Complete the sen­ tences by using th e proper forms of th e words in parentheses.

1. A: (you, have) B: Yes, I do. I {plan)

a.m t> ểa i(itiitỹ

A: (you, be, ever) B: Yes, I have. I (be) (live)

any plans for vacation?

Do ỷOt*. k&M

to go to New Orleans.

ỷO a. e& es- èe&K UO.S

there before?

in New Orleans two months ago. My brother

ểiv-eeỊis ể/* ;* ỷ

there, so I (go)

ỹo

there often.

2. A: Where's Jessica? B: She (study)________________________ at the library. A: When (she, g et)_____________________ back home? B: In an hour or so. Probably around five o'clock. A: How long (she, study) _____________________ at the library? B: Since two o'clock this afternoon. A: (she, study)___________________ at the library every day? B: Not every day, but often. 3. A: Shhh. Irene (ta lk)_____________________ on the phone long-distance. B: Who (she, ta lk )_____________________ to? A: Her brother. They (ta lk)_____________________ for almost an hour. I think her brother is in some kind OÍ trouble. B: That's too bad. I hope it's nothing serious.

FUNDAMENTALS OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 195

A: {you, w a n t)_____________________ to quit? B: Yes. I {plan) ___________________________________ to quit very soon. In fact, I (decide)_______________________ to quit on my next birthday. My twenty-first birthday is two weeks from now. On that day, I {smoke)______________________ my last cigarette. A: That's terrific! You {feel)___________________________ much better after you {stop)_____________________ smoking. R: (you, smoke, ever) _____________________ ? A: No, I haven't. I (have, never) ______________________ a cigarette in my life. When I (be)__________________ ten years old, I {smoke)________________________ one of my uncle's cigars. My sister and I (sneak)__________________________a couple of his cigars out of the house and (go)___________________ behind the garage to smoke them. Both of us (get) ________________________________ sick. I (have, n o t)_____________________ anything to smoke since then. B: That's smart.

7-8 MIDSENTENCE ADVERBS C Á C T R Ạ N G T Ừ Đ Ứ N G GIỮA C Â U (a) I always get up at 6:30. (b) You probably know the right answer.

Som e adverbs typically occur in th e m iddle of a sentence, n o t at th e beginning or en d of a sentence. These adverbs, such as always,

are called “midsentence adverbs." Một số trạng từ thường đứng ở giữa câu, không đúhg đẳu hoặc cuối câu. Các trạng từ này,như always, được gọi là "các trạng từ đứng giữa câu."

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 197

(e) I will always remember her. She is probably sleeping. They have finally ỷừiừhed their work.

In (e): Midsentence adverbs come between a helping verb and a main verb. Trọng (e): Các trạng từ đúhg giữa câu đứng giữa trợ dộng từ và động từ chính.

■(f) Do you always eat breakfast? Did Tom finally finish his work? Is she usually on time for class?

In (f): In a QUESTION, the adverbs come di­ rectly after the subject. Tròng (f): Trong CÂU HỎI, trạng từ đúhg ngay sau chủ ngữ.

(g) She usually doesn't eat breakfast. I probably won't go to the meeting.

In (g): In a NEGATIVE sentence, m o st adverbs

come in front of the negative verb (except al­ ways a n d ever). Trong (g ): Trong c â u PHỦ ĐỊNH, h ầ u h ế t c á c trạng từ đứng truớc động từ phủ định (trừ al­ ways và ever).

(h) She doesn't always eat breakfast. He isn't ever on time for class.

In (h): Always and ever follow a negative helping verb or negative be. Trọng (h): Always và ever theo sau trợ động từ phủ định hoặc phủ định của be.

(i) CORRECT: She never eats meat. (j) INCORRECT: She doesn't never eat meat.

Negative adverbs (seldom, rarely, hardly ever, never) are NOT used w ith a negative verb. Trạng từ phủ định (seldom (ít khi); rarely (hiếm khi), hardly ever (hiếm khỉ), never (không/ chưa bao giờ)) KHÔNG được dùng với động từ phủ đjnh.

□ EXERCISE 26: A d d th e w o rd in italics to th e se n te n c e . P u t th e w o rd in its usual m idsentence position. 1. alw ays

Tom studies at home in the evening.

2. alw ays

Tom is at home in the evening.

3. alw ays

You can find Tom at home in the evening.

4. usually

The mail comes at noon.

5. usually

The mail is here by noon.

6. probably

The mail will be here soon.

7. often

Ann stays home at night.

8. often

Ann is at home at night.

9. probably

Ann will stay home tonight.

10. finally

Jack wrote me a letter.

11. finally

The semester is over. FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 199

□ EXERCISE 28: Add the word(s) in italics to the sentence. Put the word in its usual midsentence position. M ake any necessary changes. 1. probably

Brian knows the answer.

2. usually

Is Pat at home in the evening?

3. finally

They have finished their work.

4. seldom

Jack doesn't write letters.

5. generally

I don't stay up late. I go to bed early.

6. probably

Susan won't come to the party. She will stay home.

7. never

You shouldn't allow children to play with matches.

8. hardly ever

Jerry isn't in a bad mood.

9. frequently

My chemistry lecturer came to class late last semester.

10. seldom

The temperature doesn't drop below freezing in Miami.

11. always

Rita rides the bus to school.

12. always

I don't ride the bus to school.

13. usually

Tom doesn't ride the bus to school.

14. never

Paul doesn't ride his bike to his office.

15. often

Our classroom is too hot.

□ EXERCISE 2 9 - ORAL (BOOKS CLOSED): Respond

in

complete

sen­

tences.

Example: What is something that you always do in the morning? Response: I always drink a cup of coffee. W hat is something t h a t . . . 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.

you seldom do? you will probably do tomoưow? you probably won't do tomorrow? you are probably going to do next week? you hardly ever do? you almost always do before you go to bed? you have never done? your roommate/spouse occasionally does? a lazy person seldom does? is always or usually expensive? a polite person usually does?

12. 13 14. 15. 16. 17 18. 19. 20.

a polite person never does? drivers generally do? your classmates sometimes do? you have already done? you just did? I frequently do in class? I usually don't do in class? you rarely eat? people in your country always or usu­ ally do to celebrate the New Year? 21. you usually do, but don't always do? 22. you usually don't do?

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 201

□ EXERCISE 30: Complete th e sentences with already, yet, still, or anymore. 1. It's 1:00 P.M. I'm hungry. I haven't eaten lunch

ỷct

2. It's 1:00 P.M. I'm not hungry. I'v e_____________________ eaten lunch. 3. Eric was hungry, so he ate a candy bar a few minutes ago. But he's__________________ hungry, so he's going to have another candy bar. 4. I used to eat lunch at the cafeteria every đay, but now I bring my lunch to school in a paper bag instead. I don't eat at the c afeteria_______________ _______. 5. It started raining an hour ago. We can't go for a walk because it's___________________ raining. I hope it stops soon. 6. Look! The rain has stopped. It isn't raining_____________________ . Let's go for a walk. 7. I didn't understand this chapter in my biology book when I read it yesterday. Since then, I've read it three times, but I _____________________ don't understand it! 8. I don't have to study tonight. I've_____________________finished all my homework. 9. I started a letter to my parents yesterday, but I haven't finished i t __________________ . I'll finish it later today and put it in the mail. 10. I started a letter to my parents yesterday. I thought about finishing it last night before I went to bed, but I didn't. I _____________________ haven't finished it.*

□ EXERCISE 31: Yet and still are frequently used in questions. Complete the fol­ lowing dialogues by using yet or still. 1. A: Is Marv home

?

B: No, but I'm expecting her soon. 2. A: Is Marv

in class?

B: Yes, she is. Her class doesn't end until 11:30. 3. A: Has Dennis graduated

?

B: No. He's still in school. 4. A: I'm hungry. How about you? Did you eat B: No. Did you? A: Nope. Let's go eat lunch. * In negative sentences, still and yet express similar meanings. The meanings of I haven't finished it yet and I still haven't finished it are similar.

Trong các câu phủ định, still và yet d iễn tả nghĩa tương tự. Nghĩa của I haven t finished. It yet và I still haven't finished ư tương tự nhau,

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 203

9. A: Is your younger sister a college student? B: No. S h e's_____________________ in high school. 10. A: When are you going to make Tomipy's birthday cake? B: I'v e_______________ _____ made it. 11. A: How did you do on your calculus exam? B: I haven't taken it_______________ . The exam is tomorrow. I'm ________________ studying for it.

□ EXERCISE 33: Using th e given information, add already, yet, still, or anymore to th e s e n te n c e s in italics.

1. I finished my work two hours ago. In other words, I have finished m y work.

-> ỈK other worlds! / kaw aểr-eaclỷ ệiiũskedmtf m r£, 2. Ann didn't finish her work yesterday. She's doing it now. In other words, she hasn't finished, it.

-> in other words, she, kas* Ủfiixiskedit aet. ->

in other wordst she, stiêểka.SK'(ậkisỉveẩiủ, *

3. I expected Mike to come home an hour ago, but he didn't come. In other words, he ừn 't home. 4. I was hungry an hour ago, but I didn't eat anything. In other words, I'm hungry. 5. Erica used to work at the drugstore, but she quit herjob./n other words, shedoesn 'twork there. 6. Susan has been working at the bookstore for a year. She has tried to find a different job, but she hasn't found one yet. In other words, she ừ workmg at the bookstore. 7. We're late. The movie started half an hour ago. In other words, the movie has started. 8. Greg started smoking four years ago. In other words, he smokes. He hasn't quit. 9. We studied Chapter 6 last week. In other words, we've studied Chapter 6. We haven't studied Chapter 8. 10. When I was a child, I used to read comic books. But they are for kids. In other words, I don't read comic books. 11. We started this exercise ten minutes ago. In other words, we haven't finished it. We are domg thừ exercise. * Reminder. In negative sentences, yet and still often express a similar meaning.

Lời nhắc: Trong câu phủ định, yet và still thường diễn tả nghĩa tương tự.

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 205

COMPARE (c) THE PAST PROGRESSIVE AND (d) THE PAST PERFECT: so SÁNH (c) THÌ QUÁ KHỨ TIÊP DIEN VÀ (d) THÌ QUÁ KHỨ HOÀN THÀNH: PAST PROGRESSIVE (c) I was eating when Bob came. 00 e £ w sz. eta E u S i>o -9 Jo CoQ

The past progressive expresses an activity that was m progress at a particular tim e in the past. Thì quá khứtiếp diễn diễn tả một hoạt động đã diễn tiến ở một thời điểm cụ thể trong quá khứ. In (c): I began to eat at noon. Bob came at 12:10. My meal was in progress when Bob came. Trong (c): Tôi đã bắt đầu ãn lúc giữa trưa. Bob đến lùc 12g1Q. Bữa ăn của tôi đang diễn tiến lúc Bob đến.

PAST p ERFECT bco 'C (D T E JZ oO ■c- Xi o

(d) I had eaten when Bob came.

The past perfect expresses an activity that was completed before a particular tune m the past. Thì quá khứ hoàn thành diễn tả

một hoạt động đã hoàn tất trước m ột thời điểm cụ thể trong quá khứ. In (d): I ate at noon. Bob came at 1:00 P.M. My meal was com ­ pleted before Bob came. Trong (d): Tôi đã ăn lúc giữa trưa. Bob đến lúc 1g chiều. Bữa ăn của tôi đã hoàn tất trước kh i Bob đến.

□ EXERCISE 35: C o m p le te th e se n te n c e s w ith th e w o rd s in p a re n th e se s. U se the PRESENT PERFECT or the PAST PERFECT. 1. I am not hungry. I (eat, already) 2. I was not hungry. I (eat, already)

/ kcm -ù a.êr& a.dỷ

._______________

/ b a d OLểre-a.aỷ eaten.

________________ _____

3. It's ten o'clock. I ựinish, already)______________________________________________ my homework, so I'm going to go to bed. 4. Last night I went to bed at ten o'clock. I (finish, already)___________________________ my homework.

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 207

4. A: (you, get)_____________________ to class on time yesterday morning? B: No. By the time I (get)_____________________________ there, it (begm, already)______________________. 5. A: {you, go )____________________

out to eat last night?

B: No. By the time I (get) _____________________ home, my husband (make, already)_____________________ dinner for us. A: How (6e)_______________________ it? B: Terrific. We (have)_____________________ chicken, rice, and a salad. While we (eat)_______________ , George Drake (stop)_______________ by to visit us, so we (.invite)____________ him to join us for dinner. But he (eat, already) __ _________ his dinner, so he (be, n o t)____________ hungry. A: What (you, do)_____________________ after dinner? B: I wanted to go a movie-Ga/axy Invaders. But George and my husband (see, already) ____________________ it, so we (go)______________________ to Ghost Ship instead. It (be)______________________ pretty good.

□ EXERCISE 3 8 - PREPOSITIONS: Complete th e sentences with prepositions. (See Appendix 1 for a list of preposition combinations.)

1. I apologized____________ A nn____________ stepping on her toe. 2. I thanked S am __________________ helping me fix my car. 3. My grandfather doesn't approve____________ gambling. 4. Please forgive m e ___________ forgetting your birthday. 5. My friend insisted___________ taking me to the airport. 6. Please excuse m e ___________ being late. 7. Children depend____________ their parents for love and support. 8. In my composition, I compared this c ity ____________my hometown. 9. Umbrellas protect people____________ rain. 10. We're relying____________ Jason to help us move into our new apartment. 11. We had mice in the house, so we set some traps to get r id ____________them. 12. What happened_____________ your finger? Did you cut it?

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAMMAR

- 209

□ EXERCISE 1: Notice th e expressions of quan tity (two, some, a lot of, etc.) th a t are u sed w ith count n o u n s and n on cou n t n ou n s in Chart 8-1. Draw a lin e through th e

expressions of quantity that cannot be used to complete the sentences. NONCOUNT NOUNS: fr u i t ...........m a il...........traffic COUNT NOUNS: apples....... letters......... cars 1. I a t e _____ a. some b.- several c. a little -d^-a few

3. I get _____ a. a lot of /1 b. some c. a little d. a few 5. There is street. a. several

b. some c. too many d. a little

e. too many f. too much g. a lot of

a. some b. several c. a little d. a few

_ _ m ail every day. e. f. g. h.

_______ a p p le s .

2. I ate

fr u it

e. too many

f. too much

f. a few g. too much

h. five

DANH TỪ KHÔNG ĐỀM ĐƯỢC

A noncount noun* is NOT preceded by a la n , one, two, three, etc. A/an, one, two, three, v.v ... KHÔNG đứng trước d a n h từ k h ô n g đ ế m đ ư ợc.

I bought a furniture. I bought a furniture.

INCORRECT: SAI:

A noncount noun does NOT have a plural form. Danh từ không đếm được INCORRECT: '

SAI:

* A noncoant noun ---------------mass noun.

is a ls o s o m e t im e s ca lled a

KHÔNG

có dạng số nhiều.

I bought some furnitures. I bought some furnitures.

Danh từ không clếrr) đ ư ợ c đ ô i k hi c ũ n g đ ư ợ c g ọ i là mass noun (d a n h từ k h ố i).

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 211

SOME COMMON NONCOUNT NOUNS: WHOLE GROUPS MADE UP OF INDIVIDUAL PARTS

MỘT s ố DANH TỪ KHÔNG ĐẾM được thông DỤNG: TOÀN BỘ NHÓM ĐƯỢC TẠO THÀNH TỪ CÁC PHAN RIÊNG LẺ A. cỉothúig equipment food fruit furniture garbage hardware jewelry machuiery mail makeup money cash change postage scenery stu ff traffic

B. homework housework work

F. grammar slang vocabulary

c. advice

G. com dirt dust flour grass hair pepper rice salt sand sugar wheat

information news D. history literature music poetry E. English, Arabic, Chinese, etc. (names of languages)

□ EXERCISE 2: Com plete th e sentences w ith th e correct form, singular or plu­ ral, of th e given nouns. W hen necessaiy, choose th e correct w ord in p aren th eses in som e of th e sentences. I bought some

ôka/r-s

2. furniture

I bought some

^usniture-

3. fruit

There (us) are) a lot of

fa u lt

4. vegetable

There (is. (arei) a lot of

M ỷ e Ìa íĩM

5. clothing

I have a lot of

1. chair

on the table. on the table.

in my closet. in her closet.

6. dress

Marv has a lot of

7. mformation

There (is, are) a lot of

in an encyclopedia.

8. fact

There (is. are) a lot of

in an encyclopedia.

9. grammar

I know a lot of

10. vocabulary

I'm learning a lot of new

11. word

I'm learning a lot of new

12. slang

I want to learn some American

13. idiom

I know a lot of English FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR —213

9. suggestion 10. advice

Can vou give me some 7

Can vou give me some

11. information

I need some

12. news

There (isn't, aren't-) anv interesting paper.

13. lake mountain

We saw a lot of

14. scenery

We saw a lot of beautiful

15. plant

Ann has a lot of

16. grass

When we went on a picnic, we sat on the

17. rice 18. English

Ahmed's children know a lot of

in today's and

on our vacation. on our vacation. in her apartment.

People in mv country eat a lot of in nursery

19. song

The children learned a lot of new school.

20. music

I eniov listening to

21. thmg

Whose

(is, are) (this, these)?

22. stuff

Whose

(is, are) (this, these)?

23. com

Rebecca had some

. for dinner. with his dinner.

24. pea

lack had some

25. makeup

Mv aunt has a drawer full of

26. bread

Mv uncle alwavs has

27. sandwich

People in Canada often have

for lunch.

28. toast

We had eees and

for breakfast.

with his dinner.

8-3 MORE N O N C O U N T N O U N S T H Ê M C Á C D A N H T Ừ K H Ô N G Đ ỀM ĐƯ ỢC (a) LIQUIDS CÁC CHAT LONG beer blood coffee cream gasolme honey juice

milk oil shampoo soup tea water wrne

s o u o s and SEMI-SOUDS CẤC CHẤT LỎNG và BÁN CHẤT lỏng bread butter cheese

ice ice cream lettuce toast

meat beef chicken fish ham lamb pork

FUNDAMENTALS

chalk copper cotton glass gold iron paper

rubber silver soap tm toothpaste wood wool

GASES CẢCCHẤT KHÍ air

fog oxygen pollution smog smoke steam

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 2 1 5

19. progress

Mr. Fernandez's English is improving. He's making a lot of

20. cowage

Be brave. You must have

21. pollution

Automobiles are the bieeest source of

in most cities. throughout much of

22. forest

The destruction of rain the world is harming the earth's envứonment.

23. peace

There have been many conflicts and wars throughout the history of the world, but almost all people Drefer

24. hospitality

Thank YOU for vour

25. beef

The were) very good.

26.

fog

we had for dinner last night (was,

During the winter months along the coast there (is, are) usually a lot o f_____________________in the morning.

□ EXERCISE 5: Com plete th e sentences w ith much or many an d th e singular or plural form of th e noun. Choose; th e correct w ord in p aren th eses as necessary. REMINDER:

Use many with count nouns: many apples. Use much with noncount nouns: much fruit.

1. apple

How

mữ/tỷ cựìpểes

2. fruit

How

mucfi ệr-u/t

3.

mail

How

did you get yesterday?

4.

letter

How

did you get yesterday?

5. postage

How

do I need for this package?

6. stamp

How

did you buy?

7. English

Anna's husband doesn't know

8. slang

Sometimes I can't understand my roommate because he uses too

9. word

H ow _____________________(is, are) there in your dictionary?

10. coffee

did you buy? did you buy?

Louise drinks to o ____________________ .

11. sandwich

Billy has a stomach ache. He ate to o ___________________

12. sugar

You shouldn't eat to o ____________________ .

13. course

H ow _____________________are you taking this semester?

14. homework H ow _____________________do you have to do tonight? 15. news

There (isn't, aren't)

'_______ in the paper today.

16. article

H ow _______________(is, are) there on the front page of today's paper? FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 2 1 7

14. laughter

We need to be able to see the humor in a situation even when we're unhappy. never hurts.

15. laugh

Greg's joke produced most of the people didn't think it was funny.

16. grammar

Pedro already knew before he took this course.

17. flower

I picked

18. progress

I've made

in the audience, but

English from my garden. in the last couple of weeks.

19. chicken

I'm still hungry. I think I'll have

20. chicken

When I was a child, we raised

more in our back yard.

a little chicken

a little chicken

a few chickens

a big chicken

a lot o f chicken

a lot of chickens

8-4 N O UN S THAT CAN BE COUNT OR N O NCO UNT C Á C D A N H T ừ C Ó T H Ể Đ ỀM

Đ ược H O Ặ C K H Ô N G Đ ỀM ĐƯ ỢC

Quite a few nouns can be used as either noncount or count nouns. Examples of both noncount and count usages for some com mon nouns follow: Rất nhiều danh từ có thể được dùng hoặc không đếm được hoặc đếm được. Các ví dụ về cả hai cách dùng đếm được và không đếm được cho một số danh từ thông dụng như sau: NOUN

USED AS NONCOUNT NOUN

glass

(a) Windows are made of glass. !(a) 1

hair iron light

■(d) Rita has brown hair. i( f ) Iron is a metal. i(h) I opened the curtain to let in some light.

USED AS A COUNT NOUN (b) (c) (e ) (g) (i )

I drank a glass of water. Janet wears glasses when she reads. There's a hair on my jacket. I pressed my shirt with an iron. Please turn off the lights {lamps).

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 219

14. coffee

We'd like two cheese sandwiches and two

15. coffee

I don’t drink a lot of

16. glass

I wear

17. glass

In some countries, people use

, please. . I prefer tea.

because I'm nearsighted. for their tea; in other

countries they use cups. 18. glass

to pro-

Framed paintings are usually covered with tect them.

19. iron

(is, are) necessary to animal and plant life.

20. iron

(is, are) used to make clothes look neat.

8-5 USIN G U N IT S OF MEASURE W ITH NO N C O U N T N O UNS D Ù N G C Á C Đ Ơ N VỊ Đ O LƯ ỜNG VỚI DA N H T Ừ K H Ô N G Đ ỀM .Đ Ư Ợ C (a) I had some tea. (b) I had two cups o f tea. (c) I ate some toast. (d) I ate one piece o f toast.

To m ention a specific quantity of a noncount noun, speakers use units of measure such as two cups o f or one piece of. A unit of measure usually describes the container (e.g., a cup of, a bowl of), the am ount (apotmd of, a quart of),* or the shape (a bar o f soap, a sheet o f paper). Để đề cập đến một số lượng cụ thể của danh từ không đếm được, người nói dùng các đơn vị đo lường như two cups o f hoặc one piece of. Đơn vị đo lường thường mô tả vật chứa (vd: cá/ tách, cái chén), khối lượng (một cân, một quart), hoặc hình dạng (bánh xà phòng, tờ/mẫnh giấỳl.

♦Weight measure: one pound = 0.45

Đo lường trọng lượng: một cân

kilogramsIkilos Liquid measure: one quart = 0.95 litres/liters four quarts = one gallon = 3.8 litresỊỉiters

Đo lường chất lỏng:

= 0,45 kí

một quart = 095 lít bốn quart = một ga-lông = 3,8 lit

□ EXERCISE 8: U se th e w ords in th e list to com plete th e sentences. U se th e p lu ­ ral form if necessary. Som e sentences have m ore th a n one possible com pletion. bar bottle bowl cup

galbn glass loaf

piece pound quart

FUNDAMENTALS

sheet spoonful tube

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 221

9. 10. 11. 12. ] 3. 14. 15.

( . . . ) cooked two cups of rice. There are (around 25) desks in this room. I use very little salt on my food. ( . . . ) knows very few students in his/her (chemistry) class. A round-trip ticket from here to (Chicago) costs ($430). There are approximately 22,000 different kinds of fish in the world. I know a lot of English vocabulary.

16. ( . . . ) invited ten people to his/her house for dinner.

17. There are (about five) pieces of chalk in the chalk tray. 18. ( . . . ) bought ten gallons of gas(oline)/petrol.

8-6

GUIDELINES FOR ARTICLE USAGE H Ư Ớ N G DẪN V É C Á C H D Ù N G MẠO TỪ USING A OR 0 (NO ARTICLE) (a) A dog makes a good pet. (b) A banana is yellow. (c) A pencil contains lead;

A speaker uses a with a singular count noun w hen s/he is making a generalization. Người nói dùng a với danh từ đếm được số ít khi đang nói điều khái quát. In (a): The speaker is talking about any dog, all dogs, dogs in general. Trong (a): Người nói đang nói về bất cứ con chó nào, bất cứ các con chó, chó nói chung.

C/5

(d) 0 Dogs make good pets. ( e ) 0 Bananas are yellow. ( f ) 0 Pencils contain lead.

A speaker uses no article (0) with a plural count noun when s/he is making a generalization.* Người nói không dùng mạo từ (0) với danh từ đếm được số nhiều khi đang nói điều gì khái quát. In (d): The speaker is talking about any dog, all dogs, dogs in general. Note: (a) and (d) have the same meaning. Lull ý: (a) và (d) có cùng nghĩa.

(g) 0 Fruit is good for you, (h) 0 Coffee contains caffeine. ( i ) I like 0 music.

A speaker uses no article (0) with a noncount noun when s/he is making a generalization* Người nói khôngdùng mạo từ (0) với danh từ không đếm được khi đang nói điều khái quát. In (g): The speaker is talking about any fruit, all fruit, fruit in general. Trong (g): Người nói đang nói vềbấtcứtrái cây nào, tất cả các trái cây, trái cây nói chung.

‘ Sometimes a speaker uses an expression of Đôi khi người nói dùng thành ngữ chỉ sô lượng quantity (e.g., almost all, most, some) when (vd: almost all, most, some) khi người dó đưa ra s/he makes a generalization: điều khái quát hóa. Almost all dogs make good pets. Most dogs are friendly. Some dogs have short hair. FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 223

USING THE DÙNG THE ( s ) Did you feed the dog? ( t ) I had a banana and an apple. I gave the banana to Mary. (u ) The pencil on that desk is Jim's. (v) The sun is shining. (w) Please close the door. (x) Mary is in the kitchen.

313

The is used in front of: The được dùng trước: singular count nouns: the dog danh từ đếm được số ít: the dog plural count nouns: the dogs danh từ đếm được số nhiều: the dogs noncount nouns: the fruit danh từ không đếm được: the fruit A speaker uses the (not a, 0 , or some) w hen the speaker and the listener are thinking about the same specific thing(s) or person(s). Người nói dùng the (chứ không phải a, 0 hoặc some) khi người nói và người nghe đang nghĩ về cùng (các) vật hoặc (các) người cụ thể.

CD

z

ƯÌ

(y)

Did you feed the dogs? I had some bananas and some apples. I gave the bananas to Mary. (aa) The pencils on that desk are Jim’s. (bb) Please turn off the lighừ. (z)

oo 4

_I

(cc) The fru it in this bowl is ripe, (dd) I drank some coffee and some milk. The coffee was hot. ( ee) I can't hear you. The m usk is too loud. (if) The air is cold today.

In (s): The speaker and thelistener are thinking about the same specific dog. The listener knows which dog the speaker is talking about: the dog that they own, die dog that they feed every day. There is only one dog that the speaker could possibly be talking about. Trong (s): Người nói và người nghe đang nghĩ về cùng một con chó cụ thể. Người nghe biết người nói đang nói về con chó nào: con chó mà họ có, con chó mà họ cho ăn mỗi ngày. Chỉ có một con chó mà người nói có thể đang nói về. In (t): A speaker uses the w hen s/h e m entions a noun the second time. Trong (t): Người nói dùng the khi người đó đề cập đến danh từ lần thứ hai. First mention: I had a banana . . . Lần đề cập đầu tiên: I had. a banana . . . Second mention: I gave the banana . . . Lần đề cập thứ hai: I gave the banana . . . In the second mention, the listener now knows which banana the speaker is talking about: the banana die speaker had (not the b a­ nana John had, not the banana in that bowl). Trong lần đề cập thứ hai, bây giờ người nghe biết người nói đang nói về trái chuối nào: trái chuối người nói có (không phải trái chùối John có, không phải trái chuối trong cái chén kia).

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 225

DIALOGUE 3:

B: Oh?

A: Did you feed ởie dog?

B: Yes.

DIALOGUE 6:

B: Oh?

A: Did you feed the dogs?

B: Yes.

DIALOGUE 9:

B: Oh?

A: The fru it in this bowl is ripe.

FUNDAMENTALS

B: Good.

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 227

12. A: I'm hungry and I'm tired of walking. How much farther is it t o . restaurant? B: Just a couple of blocks. Let's c ro ss____________street here. A: Are you sure you know where you're going? 13. A: Did Bob find_____________ job? B: Yes. He's working a t ____________ restaurant. A: Oh? Which one? 14. A: Did you feed_____________ cat? B: Yes. I fed him a couple of hours ago. 15. A: Does Jane h av e____________ cat? B: No, she h a s ________

dog. She doesn't like cats.

16. A: Where's Dennis? B: He's in

___

kitchen.

17. A: Do you like your new apartment? B: Yes. It h a s ____________ big kitchen.

□ EXERCISE 12: Complete the sentences w ith the given nouns. Use ứte for spe­ cific statements. Do not use the for general statements.

'owef-g

1. flowers

in that vase are beautiful.

___ _ are beautiful. ___ are beautiful.

2. mountams

___ in Colorado are beautiful. ___ consists of hydrogen and oxygen.

3. water

b. I don't want to go swimming today._______________ is too cold. 4. mformation

a.

in that book is inaccurate.

b. An encyclopedia is a source o f____________________ . 5. health

a . ___________________ is more important than money. b. Doctors are concerned w ith_________________ of their patients.

6. men

a.

generally have stronger muscles than

women b. At the party last night, room a n d __________

FUNDAMENTALS

sat on one side of the sat on the other.

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 229

□ E X E R C IS E 14: Use alanjsome or the in the following. REMINDER: Use the when

a noun is mentioned for th e second time. 1. Yesterday I saw

a.

dog and

ữ

cat.

dog was chasing

the-

cat.

____________cat was chasing_____________mouse. ____________ mouse ran into ____________hole, b u t____________ hole was very small.____________ cat couldn't get into____________hole, so it ran u p ____________ t r e e . ____________ dog tried to clim b____________tree too, but it couldn't. 2. Yesterday I bought____________ dothes. I bought____________ su it,____________ shirt, and________________ tie.

______________suit is gray and comes with a vest.

____________shirt is pale blue, a n d ____________ tie has black and gray stripes. 3. Yesterday I s a w ____________ man a n d _____________ woman. They were having

____________argum ent.____________________________________ man was yelling a t _woman, and ________________ woman was shouting a t ________________ man. I don't know what

____________ argument was about. 4. I had_____________soup and________________________________ sandwich for lunch._______ soup too salty, but

___________sandwich was pretty good.

5. A: I sa w ____________accident yesterday. B: Oh? Where? A: On Grand Avenue.____________ man in ____________ Volkswagen drove through a stop sign and h it____________ bus. B: Was anyone hurt i n ____________ accident? A: I don't think s o .____________ man who was driving____________ Volkswagen got out of his car and seemed to be okay. His car was only slightly damaged. No one in ____________bus was hurt. 6. A: What did you do last weekend? B: I went o n ____________ picnic Saturday and saw ______________ movie Sunday. A: Did you have fun? B: ____________picnic was fun, b u t____________ movie was boring.

□ EXERCISE 15: Complete th e sentences with a, an, some, the, or 0. 1. A: Do you like ______ 0 ______ fruit?

B: Very much. 2. A: I'm hungry. B: Would you lik e ______________ fruit? How about_______________ apple? FUNDAMENTALS OF EN G LISH G R A M M A R - 231

20. During our vacation in Florida, we walked along___________

beach in front of our

hotel and looked a t _____________ ocean. seawater

21. People can drink _____________fresh water. They can't drink because it contains 22 . ' had

salt.

_________ interesting experience yesterday.

__________ man in

________bouquet of blue suit came into my office and handed me man before in my life, but I flowers. I had never seen

thanked him for

flowers. Then he walked o u t____________door.

8-7 U SIN G EXPRESSIONS OF QUANTITY AS PRONOUNS DÙNG CÁC THÀNH NGỮ CHỈ s ô LƯỢNG LÀM ĐẠI TỪ Expressions o f quantity are words that describe the num ber or am ount of a noun. Các thành ngữ chỉ s ố lượng là các từ mô tả số lượng hoặc khối lượng của danh từ.

Examples of com m on expres­ sions of quantity: Các ví dụ về các thành ngữ chỉ số lượng thông dụng:

some (vài, chút ít), any (bết cứ), many (nhiều), much (nhiều), a lot (of) (rthiềtì), a few (vài), a little (chút it), two (hai), a couple (of) (hai), three (ba), several (nhiều), etc. v .v ...

Expressions of quantity are usually used in front of a noun (e.g., some paper, a lot o/fruit). They can also be used alo n e- without a noun - when the meaning is clear, i.e., when both speaker and listener know w hat the expression of quantity refers to. These expressions function as pronouns. Các thành ngữ chì số lượng thường được dùng trước danh từ (vd: some paper, a lot o f fruit). Chúng cũng có Ihể được dùng một mình - không có danh từ - khi nghĩa rõ ràng, nghĩa là, khi cả người nói và người nghe biết thành ngữ chỉ số lượng đó đề cập đến điều gì. Các thành ngữ này có chức năng đại từ. (a)

A: B:

In (a): any and some are used without a noun. It is clearly understood that: Trong (a): any và some được dùng không có danh

I need some yellow paper. I don't have any. Ask Matt. I think he has some.

từ. Nó được hiểu một cách rõ ràng là:

any = any yellow paper an y

=

bất c ứ giấy vàng nào

some = some yellow paper* some

(b)

A:

=

chút ít giấy vàng

In (b): many = many baseball games

I understand you're a base­

ball fan. Have you gone to a lot of baseball games? B: Yes. I've gone to many. I saw three just last week.

Trong (b): m any = nhiều trận đấu bóng chày three = three baseball games

*ln general, any is used in negative sentences; some is used in affirmative sentences.

three = ba trận dấu bón g chày

Nói chung, any được dùng trong câu phủ định;

some được dùng trong câu khẳng định.

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 233

8-8

NONSPECIFIC OBJECT PRONOUNS: SOME, ANY, AND

ONE ĐẠI TỪTÂN NGỮ KHÔNG c ụ THỂ: SOME, ANY, VÀ ONE (a) A: I need some blank tapes, (nonspecific) B: I don't have any, but Jack has some. (b) A: B:

W here are the blank tapes that w ere on my desk? (specific) Rita has them.

O bject p ro n o u n s for PLURAL COUNT NOUNS: Các đại từ tân ngữ cho DANH Từ ĐÊM ĐƯỢC số NHIỀU: nonspecific -> some or any không cụ thể -» some hoặc any specific -> them cụ thể —> them

ỉn (a): The speakers are not talking about specific tapes. In (b): The speakers are talking about specific tapes, th e tapes SPEAKER A left o n h er desk. Trong (a): Những người nói không đang nói về các băng cụ thể. Trong (b): Những người nói đang nói về các băng cụ t h ể , các băng NGUỠI NÓI A đ ã đ ể trên bàn của mình. (c) A: B:

I need a blank tape,

(d) A:

W here's the blank tape that was on my desk? (specific) / Rita has it.

B:

O bject p ro n o u n s for SINGULAR COUNT

( n o n s p e c i f ic )

I think you can get one from Jack.

N O U N S:

Đại từ tân ngữ cho số ÍT:

DANH

Từ ĐẾM

ĐUỢ c

nonspecific -> one không cụ thể -> one specific -» it, her, him cụ thể -» it, her, him

(e )

A:

Would

y o u lik e

some coffee ?

(n o n sp e ­

B:

( f)

O b jec t

p ron oun s

fo r

NONCOUNT

NOUNS:

c ific )

No thanks, I just had some. I don't want

Các đ ạ i

any

ĐẾM ĐUỢC:

r ig h t n o w .

A:

Your

B:

y o u r co ịịeẽì I d r a n k it.

c u p is e m p t y .

What h a p p e n e d

to

( s p e c if i c )

từ tâ n n g ữ c h o DANH TỪ KHÔNG

nonspecific -> some or any không cụ thể -» some hoặc any specific ->■ it cụ thể -» it

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 235

□ EXERCISE 18 - ERROR ANALYSIS: All of th e following sentences contain m istakes. Can you find th e m istakes an d correct them ? 1. There are a lot of informations in that book. 2. The oil is a natural resource. 3 Lions are wild animal. 4. I was late because there were too many traffics. 5. I drank two waters. 6. Our teacher gives us too many homeworks. 7. Ann knows a lot of vocabularies.

8. I had a egg for breakfast. 9. There is many kind of trees in the world. 10. I'm studying the English. 11. I'm living in United State. 12. Only twelve student were in class yes­ terday. 13. I need some advices. 14. We all have a few problem in the life.

□ EXERCISE 19 - WRITTEN: Write about one (or both) of the following topics. 1. Look around your room, apartm ent, house. Tell your reader what you see. Indicate quan­ tity (some, a lot of, two, etc.) and position (m the corner, next to the bed, etc.).

2. Think of someone you admire. Tel] your reader why you admire this person.

□ EXERCISE 20 - PREPOSITIONS: Complete the sentences with prepositions. (See A ppendix 1 for a list o f p reposition com binations.) 1. Shhh. I'm trying to concentrate__ __________this math problem. 2. My opinion is different_____________yours. I disagree_____________ you.

3. How did the bank robbers escap e____________jail? 4. What did you tell your p aren ts____________the dent in their new car? Did you tell them that you hit a parking meter when you were trying to parallel park?

5. The Jordans lost everything when their house burned down. I feel very Sony ____________them. I'm so rry _____________the fire. 6. We're hoping____________ good weather tomorrow so we can go sailing. 7. Did you h e a r____________ the earthquake in Turkey? 8. I heard ____________ my sister last week. She wrote me a letter. ■ 9. I spoke____________Dr. R ice_____________my problem. 10. I'm not accustomed_____________________ cold weather. 11. When you divide 2 ____________ 6, the answer is 3. 12. When you subtract 1 _______ -

6, the answer is 5.

13. When you multiply 6 _____________ 3, the answer is 18.* 14. When you add 6 ____________ 4, the answer is 10.** * Also possible: multiply 6 tunes 3. **Also possible: add 6 and 4; add 6 plus 4.

Cũng có thể được: multiply 6 times 3. Cũng có thể được: add 6 and 4; add 6plus 4.

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 237

9-1 CONNECTING IDEAS WITH AND NÒI CÁC Ý V3l AND When and connects only two items within a sentence, NO COMMAS are used. When and connects three or m ore items in a series in a sentence, commas are used. Khi and chì nối hai vật trong một câu, KHÔNG dùng CÁC DẤU PHẨY. Khi and nối ba hoặc nhiều vật hơn của một loạt trong một câu,dùng các dấu phẩy. (a) I saw a cat and a mouse. (b) I saw a cat, a mouse, and a rat. I saw a cat, a mouse, a rat, and a dog. (c) I opened the door and walked into the room. (d) I opened the door, walked into the room, and sat down at my desk. (e) Their flag is green and black. ( f ) Their flag is green, black, and yellow.

In (a): and connects two nouns: Trong (a): and. nối hai danh tift cat + mouse = NO COMMAS cat + mouse = KHÔNG cố CÁC DẤU PHẨY

In (b): and connects three or m ore nouns, so commas are used* Trong (b): and nối ba hoặc nhiều danh từ hơn, vì vậy dùng các dấu phẩy.

In (c): NO COMMAS are used because a n d connects only two verbs (opened+ walked). Trong (c): KHÔNG dùng CÁC DẤU PHẨY vì and

chỉ nối hai động từ (opened + walked). In (d): Commas are used because and con­ nects three verbs (opened + walked + sat). Trong (d): Dùng các dấu phẩy vì and nối ba động từ (opened + walked + sat). In (e): and connects two adjectives (NO COMMAS). Trong (e): and nối hai tính từ (KHÔNG CỐCẢC DẤU PHẨY).

In (f): and connects three adjectives (commas). Trong (f): and nối ba tính từ(cácdấu phẩy). When and connects two sentences, a com m a is usually used. Khi and nối hai câu, thường dừng dấu phẩy. * In a series of three or more items, the comma before and is optional. ALSO CORRECT: I saw a cat, a mouse and a

Trong một loạt gồm ba hoặc nhiều vật hơn, dấu phẩy tiước and là tùy chọn. CŨNG ĐÚNG: I saw a cat, a mouse and a rat.

rat

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 239

□ EXERCISE 3: A d d COMMAS a n d PERIODS w h e re a p p ro p ria te . CAPITALIZE as n ecessary .

1. I talked he listened. -> / taểi/ed. M e ểist&ned.

2. I talked and he listened.

-> / taMed, axd he, ểk'texed. * 3. I talked to Ryan about his school grades and he listened to me carefully.

-> / tM e d to R^olk aéũat kis sckooểỷradex, and ke, êist&K&d to me, careệoíểểp, 4. I talked to Ryan about his grades he listened carefully and promised to improve them.

-> /taêìiedto R^ũn aloutkissakooểỷraấe#. He* ểiste,K&dca^aểểỷ tod promised to improv-e. tk&M. 5. The river rose it flooded the towns in the valley. 6. The river rose and flooded the towns in the valley. 7. The river rose and it flooded the towns in the valley. 8. The river rose it flooded the towns and farms in the valley. 9. The river and streams rose they flooded the towns and farms in the valley. 10. Rome is an Italian city it has a mild climate and many interesting attractions. 11. You should visit Rome its climate is mild and there are many interesting attractions. 12. The principal metals used to make coins are gold silver copper and nickel. 13. Coins are made of metal and last for. a long time paper money has a short life span. 14. Collecting stamps can teach a youngster about some of the famous people and events in a country's history. 15. The United States is bounded by two oceans and two countries the oceans are the Pacific to the west and the Atlantic to the east and the countries are Canada to the north and Mexico to the south.

* Sometimes the comma is omitted when and connects two very short independent clauses. ALSO CORRECT: I talked and he Ustened. In longer sentences, the comma is important and usual.

Đôi khi dấu phẩy được bỏ khi and nối hai mệnh đề độc lập rất ngấn. CŨNG ĐÚNG: Italkeđandhe lừtened. Trong c á c câu dài hơn, dấu phẩy quan trọng và thông thường.

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 2 \ l

□ EXERCISE 5: A dd COMMAS, PERIODS, an d CAPITAL LETTERS as appropriate. 1. Cats are mammals turtles are reptiles.

— >Ca.ts are ma.mmaểs. Tar-tểes are re,f>tỉ'ể&g. 2. Cats are mammals but turtles are reptiles.

3. Cows are farm animals but zebras are wild animals. 4. Cows and horses are farm animals but zebras and giraffes are wild animals. 5. Cows and horses are farm animals zebras giraffes and lions are wild animals. 6. Cars use roads trains run on tracks. 7. Cars use roads but trains run on tracks. 8. Cars buses and trucks use roads but trains run on tracks. 9. Most vegetables grow above the ground but som e are roots and grow under the ground

corn beans and cabbage grow above the ground but carrots and beets grow under the ground. 10. A good office has modern equipment such as computers intercoms and copying machines but the most important part of a good office is the people who work there.

9-3 CONNECTING IDEAS W ITH s o N Ô IC Á C Ý V Ớ I S O (a) The room was dark, so I turned on a light. (b) I didn't study, so I failed the exam.

So can be used as a conjunction. It is preceded by a comma. It connects the ideas in two independent clauses. So ex­ presses results: So (vì vậy) có thể được dùng làm liên từ. Trước nó là dấu phẩy. Nó nối các ý trong hai mệnh đề độc lập. So diễn tả các kết quả: cause: nguyên nhân: result: kết quả:

the room was dark the room was dark I turned on a light I turned on a light

□ EXERCISE 6: A dd so or but. A dd COMMAS w here appropriate. 1. It began to ra in _____ .£0_____ I opened my umbrella. 2. It began to rain

■ầ u t

I didn't have my umbrella with me.

3. I didn't have an um brella____________ I got wet. FUNDAMENTALS O F

ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 243

9-4 USING AUXILIARY VERBS AFTER B U T A N D AND DÙNG TRỢ ĐỘNG TỪ SAU B U T VÀ AND (a) (b) (c) (d) (e )

I don't like coffee, but my husband does. I like tea, but my husband doesn't I won't be here tomorrow, but Sue will. I've seen that movie, but Joe hasn't. He isn't here, but she ừ.*

(f ) (g) (h) (i) (j )

I don't tike coffee, and Ed doesn't either. I like tea, and Kate does too. I won't be here, and he w on't either. ĩve seen that movie, and Pat has too. He isn't here, and Anna isn't either.

After but and and, often a m ain verb is not repeated. Instead, only an auxiliary verb is used. The auxiliary is a substitute for the m ain verb phrase. The auxiliary after but and and has die same tense or modal as the main verb. Sau but và and, thường không lặp lại động từ chính. Thay vào đó, chĩ dùng trợđộng từ. Trợ động từ là từ thay th ế cho cụm động từ

chính. Trợ động từ sau but và and có cùng thì hoặc động từ khuyết làm động từ ch ính. In (a): does = likes coffee. The auxiliary does (simple present) is the substitute for the m ain verb phrase (simple present). Trong (a): does = likes coffee. Trợ động từ does (hiện tại đơn) là từ thay thế cho cụm động từ chính (hiện tại đơn).

Notice in the examples: Luu ý trong các ví dụ: negative + but + affirmative phủ định + but + khẳng định affirmative + but + negative khẳng định + but + phủ định negative + and + negative phũ định + and + phũ định affirmative + and. + affirmative khẳng định + and + khẳng định * A verb is not contracted with a pronoun at the end of a sentence after but and and'. CORRECT: ĐÚNG INCORRECT SAI

Động từ không được rút gọn với đại từ ở cuối câu sau but và and:

.. but she ừ. . . but she ũ. . . but she's. ... but she's.

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 245

12. ____________has long hair, b u t______________ 13. ____________has lived here for a long time, but 14. ____________lives in an apartment, b u t_______ 15. _______

doesn't have a car, b u t_________

□

EXERCISE 10: C om plete th e sen ten ces b y u sin g th e n am es o f your class­ m ates. A dd too (if th e auxiliary verb is affirm ative) or either (if th e auxiliary v erb is negative) to th e en d o f th e sentences.

1. __ Co.r-ểog__ hasapenwithblueink,and___ tyo&o docs tỡQ__ 2. _____ A ể i _________ doesn't speak Chinese, and

R o ếí-p to docgK t e-ith/W

3. ____________ isn't married, an d __________________________________________ 4. ____________ sits in the same seat every day, an d __________________________ 5.

.________ is wearing jeans today, an d __________________________________

6. ____________walked to class today, a n d ___________________________________ 7. ____________was in class yesterday, an d __________________________________ 8. ____________didn't call me last night, an d __________________________________ 9. ____________ isn't married, an d __________________________________________ 10. ____________ comes to class every day, a n d _______________________________ 11. ____________has brown eyes, a n d ________________________________________ 12. ____________ has been here for over a month, a n d __________________________ 13. ____________doesn't have a beard, an d _____________________________ _______ 14. ____________can't speak Arabic, an d _____________________________________ 15. ____________ will be in class tomorrow, an d _______________________________

9-5 U SIN G AND + TOO ,

so, EITHER ,

NEITHER DÙNG AND + TOO, so, EITHER , NEITHER

A N D ... TOO (a) Sue likes milk, AND + s + aux +

TOO

(a) and (b) have the same meaning, (a) và (b) có cùng nghĩa.

'and1 'Tom1 'does1 'too.1

AND SO . . .

Notice in (b): After and so the auxiliary verb (aux) comes before (b) Sue likes milk, the subject (S). AND + so + aux + s LiAj ý tróng (b): Sau and so . . trợ 'a n d 1 ữ 'd o e s ' 'T o m .1 động từ (aux) đứng tníỡc chủ ngữ (S).

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 247

4. Oregon

California is on the West Coast, and s o . California is on the West Coast, and ________________________ _ too.

5. Jean

I went to a movie last night, and so _____________________________ . I went to a movie last night, an d _____________________________too.

6. Jason

I didn't study last night; and neither _____________________________ . I didn’t study last night, and

7. Dick

'____________________ either.

Jim can't speak Arabic; and neither ______________________________ . Jim can't speak Arabic; an d _________________ ;_______ _____ either.

8. Laura

I like to go to science fiction movies, and s o _______________________ . I like to go to science fiction movies, an d ______________________ too.

9. Alice

I don't like horror movies, and neither_________________ ___________ . I don't like horror movies, and____________________________ either.

10.

porpoừes Whales are mammals, and s o ________________________________ . Whales are mammals, an d ________________________________ _ too.

PORPOISE 1 1 .7

Karen hasn't seen that movie yet, and n e ith e r.

Karen hasn't seen that movie yet, a n d _____________________ either 12. m y brother I have a car, and so I have a car, an d ______________________ __________________ _ too 13. Erin

Rob won't join us for lunch, and neither. Rob won't join us for lunch, an d __________________ ________ either

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 249

9.

A: I didn't eat breakfast this morning. B: ______________________

10. A: I should stay home and study tonight. B: 11. A: I have a roommate. B: 12. A: I've never visited Vancouver, British Columbia. B: ______________________ 13. A: I don't have a car. B: 14. A: I have to go downtown this afternoon. B: ______________________ 15. A: I can't speak Hungarian.

B: 16. A: But I can speak English. B:

□

EXERCISE 14 - ORAL (BOOKS CLOSED): R esp on d to th e statem en ts by

u sin g so or neither.

Example: Los Angeles is in California. Response: So is (San Francisco). 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

speaks (languagej. doesn't speak (language). is wearing (jeans) today. isn't wearing (jeans) today. came to class yesterday. has been in (this city) for (time). can't speak (language). (. (A city) is in (this state/province). The United States is in North America. (Niagara Falls) is a famous landmark. (. (. (. (. (. (.

.) .) .) .) .) .) .)

11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20.

FUNDAMENTALS

Ants are insects. A bicycle has two wheels. Mercury is a planet. Snakes don't have legs. Chickens lay eggs. Copper is a metal. Coffee contains caffeine. The sun is a source of energy. Pencils aren't expensive. Paper burns.

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 251

(f) is incorrect: because he was thirsty can­ not stand alone as a sentence that starts with a capital letter and ends with a peri­ od. It has to be connected to a m ain clause as in (d) and (e). (f) sai: because he was thirsty không thể đúng một mình làm một câu bắt đầu với một mẫu tự hoa và kết thúc với một dấu chấm. Nó phải được nối với mệnh đề chính như trong (d) và (e).

(f) INCORRECT:

He drank water. Because he was thirsty.

* See Chart 2-8 for a discussion of other adverb Xem Bảng 2-8 bàn về các mệnh đề trạng ngữ clauses. Tim e clauses" are adverb clauses that are khác. "Mệnh đề thời gian" là mệnh đê trạng introduced by when, after, before, and while. ngữ được giới thiệu bởi when, after, before, và

while. □ EXERCISE 15: C om bine each p air of sentences in two different orders. U se because. 1. We didn't have class. The teacher was absent.

-> Itfe //cốt 'tkao-e cểass Ềe,aause the, Ú&acÁer was aé sent. -^Se-ữHu.ểe, the, teackor- was aès&nt, toe, diJn ( kau-e- cểass. 2. The children were hungry. There was no food in the house. 3. The bridge is dosed. We can't drive to the other side of the river. 4. My car didn't start. The battery was dead. 5. Debbie woke up in the morning with a sore throat. She had cheered

loudly at the basketball game. □ EXERCISE 16: Complete the sentences w ith so or 6ecause. Add COMMAS where

appropriate. CAPITALIZE as necessary. ir a. He was hungry

b.

Sccau.se

c. He ate a sandwich

. so

he ate a sandwich.

hewashungry, heateasandwich. Ì&ŨO.U.S&

he was hungry.

2. a. ______________________my sister was tired she went to bed. b. My sister went to b e d _____________________ she was tired. c. My sister was tire d _____________________ she went to bed.

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 253

□ E X E R C IS E 17: Add COMMAS, PERIODS, and CAPITAL LETTERS as a p p ro p ria te. Don't change any of the words or th e order of the words.

1. Jim was hot he sat in the shade. 2. Jim was hot and tired he sat in the shade. 3. Jim was hot and tired so he sat in the shade. 4. Jim was hot tired and thirsty. 5. Because he was hot Jim sat in the shade. 6. Because he was hot and thirsty Jim drank some tea. 7. Because he was hot and thirsty Jim sat in the shade and drank some tea. 8. Because they were hot and thirsty Jim and Susan sat in the shade and drank tea. 9. Jim and Susan sat in the shade and drank tea because they were hot and thirsty. 10. Jim sat in the shade drank tea and fanned himself because he was hot tired and thirsty. 11. Because Jim was hot he stayed under the shade of the tree but Susan went back to work. 12. Mules are domestic animals they are the offspring of a horse and a donkey mules are called “beasts of burden” because they can work hard and carry heavy loads. 13. Because mules are strong they can work under harsh conditions but they need proper care. 14. A wolf howls because it is separated from its pack or its pup has died. 15. Ann had been looking for an apartment for two weeks yesterday she went to look at an apartment on Fifth Avenue she rented it because it was in good condition and had a nice view of the city she was glad to find a new apartment. 16. The word “matter” is a chemical term matter is anything that has weight this book your finger water a rock air and the sun are all examples of matter radio waves and heat are not matter because they do not have weight happiness daydreams and fear have no weight and are not matter.

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 255

7. ____________________ Jane was sad, she smiled. 8. ____________________ Jane was sad, she cried. 9. _____________________her street is dangerous, Carol doesn't go out alone after dark. 10. _____________________his street is dangerous, Steve often goes out alone after dark. 11. Tony sings at weddings______________________ he has a good voice. 12. George sings loudly_____________________ he can't carry a tune. 13. Louie didn't iron his s h irt_____________________________________ it was wrinkled. 14. Eric ironed his s h irt_____________________ it was wrinkled. 15. Kate went to a d en tist_______________________ she had a toothache. 16. Colette didn't go to a d en tist_____________________ she had a toothache. 17. Jennifer went to a d e n tist______________________ she didn't have a toothache. She just wanted a checkup. 18.1 would like to raise tropical fis h _____________________ it's difficult to maintain a fish tank in good condition. 19. The baby shoved the pills into his m o u th _____________________ they looked like candy._____________________ he ingested several pills, he didn't get sick. Today many pill bottles have child-proof caps _____________________ children may think pills are candy and poison themselves. 20. _____________________ our friends live on an island, it is easy to get there _____________________ there is a bridge from the mainland.

□ EXERCISE 19 - ORAL (BOOKS CLOSED): Answer “yes” or “no,” as you wish. Answer in a complete sentence using either because or even though. Change the wording as you wish. Example: Last night you were tired. Did you go to bed early? Response: Yes, I went to bed early because I was tired. OR: Yes, because I was tired, I went to bed before nine. OR: No, I didn't go to bed early even though I was really sleepy. OR: No, even though I was really tired, I didn't go to bed until after midnight. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Last night you were tired. Did you stay up late? You are thirsty. Do you want (a glass of water)? You’re hungry. Do you want (a candy bar)? Vegetables are good for you. Do you eat a lot of them? Space exploration is exciting. Would you like to be an astronaut? Guns are dangerous. Do you want to own one? (A local restaurant) is expensive/inexpensive. Do you eat there? FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 257

6. Even I am very exhausted, I didn't stop working until after midnight last night. 7. The teacher went too the meeting, and too of the students did two. 8. Although I like chocolate, but I can't eat it because I'm allergic to it. 9. Many tourists visit my country. Warm weather all year. Many interesting landmarks. 10. Because the weather in my country is warm and comfortable all year so many tourists visit it in the winter. 11. I like to eat raw eggs for breakfast and everybody else in my family too. 12. A hardware store sells tools and nails and plumbing supplies and paint and etc.* 13. Because the war broke out in late September we had to cancel our October trip even though we already had our passports visas airplane tickets and hotel reservations. 14. Many of us experience stress on our jobs my job is stressful because my workplace is not pleasant or comfortable it is noisy hot and dirty even though I try to do my best my boss is unhappy with my work and always gives me bad performance reports I need to find another job.

9-8 PHRASAL VERBS (SEPARABLE) CỤM ĐỘNG Từ (CÓ TH Ể TÁCH RA) In (a): p u t o ff = a phrasal verb.* Trong (a): p u t o ff = cụm động từ. A phrasal verb= a verb and a particle that together have a spe­ cial meaning. For example, p u t o ff m eans "postpone." Cụm động từ = động từ và tiểu từ đi với nhau có nghĩa đặc biệt. Ví dụ, p u t o ff nghĩa là "hoãn lại." A particle = a preposition (e.g., off, on) or an adverb (e.g., away, back) that is used in a phrasal verb. Tiểu từ = giới từ(vd: off, on) hoặc trạng từ (vd: away, back) được dùng trong cụm động từ. *

Phrasal verbs are also called two-word verbs and three-word, verbs.

* Etc. is an abbreviation of the Latin et cetera. It

Cụm động từ cũng được gọi là động từ có hai từ và động từ có ba từ.

Etc. là từ viết tát của tiếng La tinh et cetera. Nó

m e a n s "and o th e r th in g s o f a sim ilar nature."

n g h ĩa là " vân v â n " . T ừ a n d KHÔNG đ ư ợ c d ù n g

The word and is NOT used in front of etc.

trước etc.

INCORRECT: SAI:

The farmer raises cows, sheep, goats, chickens, and etc. The farmer raừes cows, sheep, goats, chkkens, and etc.

INCORRECT: The farmer rakes cows, sheep, goats, and chickens, etc. SAI: The farmer rakes cows, sheep, goats, and chickens, etc. A lso , n o t ic e th e spelling:

etc.

NOT

ect.

N g o à i ra, lưu ý c á c h v iế t:

FUNDAMENTALS

etc.

KHÔNG p h ả i

ect.

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 259

□ EXERCISE 22: Complete the sentences w ith the following particles: away, dawn, in, off, on, out, up. 1. Before I left home this morning, I p u t____________m y coat. 2. When I got to class this morning, I took my coat____________. 3. The students handed their hom ework____________ . 4. Johnny made a sto ry ____________. He didn't tell the truth. 5. The weather was bad, so we p u t____________ the picnic until next week. 6. Alice looked a w o rd ____________ in her dictionary. 7. Alice wrote the definition____________ . 8. My roommate is messy. He never picks____________his clothes. 9. The teacher handed the test p apers_____________ at the beginning ofthe class period. 10. A strange noise w o k e____________ the children in the middle of the night. 11. When some friends came to visit, Chris stopped watching TV. He turned the television s e t ____________. 12. It was dark when I got home last night, so I turned the lights____________. 13. Peggy finally figured____________ the answer to the arithmetic problem. 14. When I was walking through the airport, my arms got tired. So I put my suitcases____________ for a minute and rested. 15. I th rew ____________ yesterday's newspaper.

□ EXERCISE 23: Complete th e sentences with pronouns and particles. 1. A: Did you postpone your trip to Puerto Rico? B: Yes, we did. We put

it eệệ

until next summer.

2. A: Is Pat's phone number 322-4454 or 322-5545?

B: I don't remember. You’d better lo o k _______________________________________ .___. The telep tory is in the kitchen. 3. A: Is Mary still asleep? B: Yes. I'd better w ak e _____________________ . She has a class at nine. 4. A: Do you want to keep these newspapers? B: No. T hrow _____________________ . FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 261

SOME COMMON PHRASAL VERBS (NONSEPARABLE)

MỘT SỐ CỤM ĐỘNG TỪ THÔNG DỤNG (KHÔNG THE TẮCH RA) call o n ............ask to speak m class g e t o v e r ......... recover from an illness

{mời/yêu cầu phát biểu) (hồi phục)

ru n in t o ..........meet by chance

(tình cờ gặp)

g e t o n .............enter Ị a bus, an airplane,a tram, lên Ị (xe buýt, máybay, xe lửa, g e t o f f .............leave J a subway, a bicycle xuống ỉ tàu điện ngầm, xe đạp) s e t i n •••••:....... f ÍỄM

g e t o u t o f ....... leave I

a car, a taxi

lê"

xuong)

) (xe hai, taxi)

□ EXERCISE 24: Complete the sentences with particles. Discuss the meaning of the phrasal verbs in the sentences. 1. When I raised my hand in class, the teacher called________ _

me.

2. While I was walking down the street, I r a n ____________an old friend. 3. Fred feels okay today. He g o t____________ his cold. 4. Last week I flew from Chicago to Miami. I g o t ____________the plane in Chicago. I got ____________the plane in Miami. 5. Sally took a taxi to the airport. She got o u t _____ _

the taxi in front of her apart­

ment building. She g o t____________ the taxi at the airport. 6. I take the bus to school every day. I get ____________the bus at the corner of First Street and Sunset Boulevard. I get ____________ the bus just a block away from the classroom building.

□ EXERCISE 25 - ORAL (BOOKS CLOSED): Complete the sentences. Example: Yesterday 1 cleaned my closet. I found an old pair of shoes that I don't ever wear anymore. I didn't keep the shoes. I threw . . . . Response: them away/out. 1. The teacher gave us some important information in class yesterday. I didn't want to for­ get it, so I wrote . . . . 2. When I raised my hand in class, the teacher called . . . . 3. I was carrying a suitcase, but it was too heavy, so I p u t . . . . 4. I didn't know the meaning of a word, so I looked . . . . 5. I was sleepy last night, so I didn't finish my homework. I p u t . . . . 6. It was dark when I got home, so I turned . . . . 7. ( . . . ) isn't wearing his/her hat right now. When s/he got to class, s/he took . . . .

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 263

CHAPTER

10

Gerunds and Infinitives Danh động từ và động từ nguyên thể 10-1 GERUNDS AND INFINITIVES: INTRODUCTION DA N H Đ Ộ N G T Ừ VÀ Đ Ộ N G TỪ N G U Y ÊN T H Ể : g i ớ i t h i ệ u noun M I I O lV ' I (a) I enjoy1I tmusic.

s

s

gerund

'Z D ,to music. (b) I enjoy lừtening

gerund phrase

(c) Ĩ enjoy listening to music.'

V

o

I enjoy something, (somethmg = die ob­ ject of the verb.) V

o

I enjoy something, (something = tân ngữ của động tu). The object of a verb is usually a noun or pronoun, as in (a). Tân ngữ của động từ thường là danh từ hoặc đại từ, như trong (a). The object of a verb can also be a gerund. A gerund is the -ingform o f a verb* It is used as a noun. Tân ngữ của động từ cũng có thể là danh động từ. Danh động từ là dạng -ing của dộng từ. Nó được dùng như danh từ. In (b): lừtening is a gerund. It is the ob­ ject of the verb enjoy. Trong (b): listening là danh động từ. Nó là tân ngữ của động từ enjoy.

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 265

10-2 VERB + GERUND

ĐỘNG TỪ + DANH ĐỘNG TỪ

COMMON VERBS FOLLOWED BY GERUNDS

enjoy finish stop* quit mmd postpone put o ff keep keep on consider thmk about ầscuss talk about

(a) I enjoy working in my garden. (b) Bob finished, studying at mid­ night. (c) It stopped raining a few mi­ nutes ago. (d) David quit smoking. ( e ) Would you m ind opening the window? ( f ) I postponed doing my home­ work. (g) I p u t o ff doing my home­ work. (h) Keep working. Don't stop. ( i ) Keep on working. Don't stop. ( j ) I'm considering going to Ha­ waii. (k) I'm thinking about going to Hawaii. ( 1) They dừcussed getting a new car. (m) They talked about getting a new car.

(n) I considered not going to class.

Gerunds are used as the objects of die verbs in the list. The list also con­ tains phrasal, verbs [e.g.,put off) that are followed by gerunds. Danh động từ được dùrvg làm tân ngữ của các động từ trong bảng kê. Bảng kê này cũng có các cụm động từ (vd: put o f f ) được danh động từ theo sau. These verbs are NOT followed by in ­ finitives.* For example:

Các

đ ộ n g từ n à y KHÔNG

được đ ộ n g

từ

nguyên thể theo sau. Ví dụ: INCORRECT: I enjoy to work. s a i:

I enjoy to work.

INCORRECT: Bob ỷừiừhed to study. SAI: Bob finished, to study. INCORRECT: I'm thinking to go to

Hawaii. SAI: I'm thinkmg to go to Hawaii. See Chart 2-5 for die spelling of -ing verb forms. Xem Bảng 2-5 về cách viết các dạng -ing của động từ. Negative form: not + gerund. Dạng phủ định: not + danh động từ.

* The object following stop is a gerund, NOT an infinitive. INCORRECT:7t stopped to rain. But in a special circumstance, stop can be followed by

Tân ngữ theo sau stop là danh động từ, KHÔNG phải la động từ nguyên thể. SAI: It stopped to rain. Nhưng trong trường hợp đặc biệt, stop có

an infinitive o f purpose: in order to (see C hart 10-1 1). While I was walking down the hall, I

thể được đọng từ nguyên thể chỉ mục đích theo sau: in order to (xem Bảng 10-11). While I was

dropped my pen. I stopped to pfck it up. - I stopped walkmg in order to pick it up.

walking down the hall, I dropped my pen. I stopped to pứ k it up. = I stopped walking in or­ der to pick it up.

□ EXERCISE 1: Complete the sentences by using gerunds. Add a preposition af­ ter the gerund if necessary.

1. It was cold and rainy yesterday, so we postponed

ỷOĨKỹ to ! v-isitii(ỷ

the botanical

gardens. 2. The Porter's house is too small. They're considering

èu.ỷii(ỷlIKŨV-Ỉiiỹ in to Ị1n u t in ỹ

a bigger house. FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 267

4. A: Good news! I feel great. I don't cough any more, and I don't run out of breath when I walk up a hill. B: Oh? A: I q u it_____________________ . B: That's wonderful! 5. A: I've been working on this math problem for the last half hour, and I still don't under­ stand it. B: Well, don't give up. K e e p _____________________ . If at first you don't succeed, try, try again. 6. A: Are you a procrastinator? B: A what? A: A procrastinator. That's someone who always postpones _________________ B: Oh. Well, sometimes I put off________________ _____________________________ . 7. A: What are you doing? B: I'm helping Teddy with his homework. A: When you finish_____________________ , could you help me in the kitchen? B: Sure. 8. A: Could you please stop doing that? B: Doing what? ' A: S top ______________________________________________ .It's driving me crazy. 9. A: Do you have any plans for this weekend? B: Henry and I talked about_______________________________________ 10. A:

•

I didn't understand what you said. Would you m ind__________________________ ?

B: Of course not. I said, “Three free trees.”

10-3 GO + -ING (a) Did you go shopping yester­ day? (b) I went swimming last week. (c) Bob hasn't gone fishing in years.

GO + -ING Go is followed by a gerund in certain idiomatic ex­ pressions about activities. Go đuợc danh động từ theo sau trong các thành ngữ đặc ngữ về các hoạt động. Notice: There is no to between go and the gerund. Lull ý: Không, có to giũa go và danh động từ. INCORRECT: SAI: CORRECT: ĐÚNG:

Did you go to shopping? Did you go to shopping? Did you go shoppmg? Did you go shoppmg?

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 269

7. Joe is a nature lover. He likes to take long walks in the woods. What does Joe like to do? 8. Sara prefers indoor sports. She goes to a place where she rolls a thirteen-pound ball at some wooden pins. What does Sara often do? 9. Liz and Greg know all the latest dances. What do they probably do a lot? 10. The Taylors are going to go to a little lake near their house tomorrow. The lake is com­ pletely frozen now that it's winter. The ice is smooth. What are the Taylors going to do tomorcow? 11. Barbara and Alex live near the ocean. When there's a strong wind, they like to spend the whole day in their sailboat. What do they like to do? 12. Tourists often get on buses that take them to see interesting places in an area. What do tourists do on buses? 13. Colette and Ben like to jump out of airplanes. They don't open their parachutes until the last'minute. What do they like to do? 14. What do you like to do for exercise and fun?

10-4 VERB + INFINITIVE Đ Ộ N G T Ừ + Đ Ộ N G T Ừ N G U Y ÊN T H Ể (a) Tom offered to len d me some money. ( b ) I've decided to buy a new car.

Some verbs are followed by an infinitive: M ộ t s ố đ ộ n g từ đ ư ợ c đ ộ n g từ n g u y ê n t h ể t h e o sa u : A N INFINITIVE =

to + the simple form o f a verb. = to + dạng đơn của động từ.

ĐỘNG TỪNGUYÊN THỂ

(c) I've decided n ot to keep my old car.

Negative form: n o t D ạ n g p h ủ đ ịn h :

+

not

+

infmitive. động từ nguyên thể.

COMMON VERBS FOLLOWED BY INFINITIVES

CÁC ĐỘNG TỪ THÔNG DỤNG ĐƯỢC ĐỘNG TỪ NGUYÊN THE THEO SAU w ant need would like would love

hope expect plan mtend mean

decide prom ừe offer agree refuse

FUNDAMENTALS

seen appear pretend forget

leam (how) try (can't) afford {can't) w ait

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 271

10-5 VERB + GERUND OR INFINITIVE ĐỘNG Từ + DANH ĐỘNG TỪ HOẶC ĐỘNG TỪ NGUYÊN THỂ Some verbs are followed by either an infinitive or a gerund. Usually there is no difference in meaning, (a) and (b) have die same meaning. Một số động từ được theo sau bởi hoặc động từ nguyên thể hoặc danh động từ. Thường không có sự khác nhau về nghĩa, (a) và (b) có cùng nghĩa.

(a) It began to rain. (b) It began raining.

COMMON VERBS FOLLOWED BY EITHER A GERUND OR AN INFINrm/E CẮC ĐỘNG TỪ THỐNG DỤNG ĐƯỢC THEO SAU BỞI HOẶC DANH ĐỘNG TỪ HOẶC ĐỘNG TỪ NGUYÊN THE begùĩ start contmue * COMPARE:

like* love*

hate can't stand

Like a n d love ca n

b e f o llo w e d b y ei-

ther a gerund or an infinitive:

s o SÁNH:

Like v à love c ó

t h ể đ ư ợ c t h e o sa u b ởi

hoặc danh động từ hoặc động từ nguyên thể:

I like going/to go to movies. I love playinglto play chess. Would like and would love are followed by in-

Would like và would love được động từ nguyên

finitives;

thể theo sau:

I would like to go to a movie tonight. I'd love to play a game of chess right now. □ EXERCISE 5 - ORAL: Use the given words to m ake sentences w ith GERUNDS

and INFINITIVES. 1. start + snow around midnight -> It started snowing around midnight. It started to snow around midnight. 2. continue + work even though everyone else stopped 3. like + listen to music while I'm studying 4. love + go to baseball games 5. hate + talk to pushy salespeople 6. can't stand + wait in lines for a long time

□ EXERCISE 6: Complete the sentences with the INFINITIVE or GERUND form of the words in parentheses. 1. I need (study)

to stu .ẩ ỷ

2. I enjoy (cook)

cooi/ìnỹ

3. Ellen started (talk)

tonight. gourmet meals.

to ta ể £ lta .ể £ ỉn ỷ FUNDAMENTALS

about her problem. OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 273

7. Dick appears (have)_____________________ a lot of money. 8. Eric agreed (meet) ___;__________________ us at the restaurant at seven. 9. Have you discussed (change) _____________________ your major with your academic advisor? 10. I haven't heard from Stacy in a long time. I keep (hope)______________________that 111 get a letter from her soon. 11. My wife can't stand (sleep)____________________ in a room with all of the windows closed. 12. Sam's tomato crop always felled. Finally he quit (.try)________________________ (grow)_____________________ tomatoes in his garden. 13. Would you like (go) _____________________ {dance)_____________________ tonight? 14. The Knickerbockers talked about (build)_____________________ a new house. 15. Children like (play) ___________________________ make-believe games. Yesterday Jason pretended (be)_____________________________ a doctor, and Bobby pretended (be) ___________________ a patient. 16. My cousin offered (take)_____ _______________ me to the airport. 17. I'm planning (go)_____________________ {shop)_________ ____________tomorrow. 18. Would you mind (pass) _____________________ this note to Joanna? Thanks. 19. Tim expects (go)____________________ ự ừ h ) ____________________ this weekend. 20. When Tommy broke his toy, he started (cry)___________________ . 21. Jerry likes (go)__________________ to professional conferences. 22. Would you like (go)_____________________ to Sharon's house next Saturday? 23. I expect (be)________in class tomorrow. 24. I enjoy (teach)___________ __________. 25. I enjoy (be)_____________________ a teacher.

□ EXERCISE 8 - ORAL: Pair up with another student. STUDENT A: Read the cues. Your book IS open. STUDENT B: Complete the sentences with either to go or going + the name o f a place.

Example: STUDENT A: STUDENT B: STUDENT A: STUDENT B:

I expect___ to go (to Mack's Bar and Grill for dinner tonight). Ilike. . . . to go (to Hawaii). OR:. . . going (to Hawaii). FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 275

□ EXERCISE 10: Complete th e sentences with a form of the words in parenthe­ ses. 1. Have you finished (paint)

_________________your apartment yet?

2. Steve needs (go)______

______________to the shopping mall tomorrow and

{buy) ________________

_winter clothes.

3. Don't forget (call) _

__________ the dentist's office this afternoon.

4. Do you enjoy (go)

_________________ to an expensive restaurant and

a gourmet dinner? _______ in a smoke-filled room. 5. Most nonsmokers can't stand (be) abroad until the political situation 6. Let's postpone (go)____________ (have) __________

improves. __ (m a ke)____________________

7. The children promised (sto p )____ so much noise.

your courses if you don't study?

8. How do you expect (pass) _______

__his job and (go)___________

9. Kevin is thinking about (quit) _ back to school.

for Chicago on Tuesday and

10. Linda plans {leave) (ireturn) _________

on Friday.

11. I often put off (.wash)___ _____________

_the dinner dishes until the next morning.

12. Shhh. I'm trying (concentrate)_________

________ . I'm doing a problem for my ac-

counting class, and I can't afford (make) 13. I'm sleepy. I'd like (go)

__________

______________ any mistakes. home and (take)

a nap. the research for your

14. When are you going to start (do)_____ term paper? 15. Why did Marcia refuse (help)________

us?

16. Don't forget (unplug) ________________ the coffee pot, (turn off) the door before you leave for work this all the lights, and (lock) morning.

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 277

10-6 UNCO M PLETED INFINITIVES CÁC ĐỘNG T ừ NGUYÊN TH Ể KHÔNG HOÀN CHỈNH (a) I've never met Rita, but I'd like to. (b) INCORRECT:

I've never met Rita, but I'd like. (c) INCORRECT:

I've never met Rita, but I'd like it. (d) INCORRECT:

In (a): I'd like to = an uncom pleted infinitive; I'd like to meet R ita = the understood comple­ tion. Trong (a): I'd like to = động từ nguyên thể không hoàn chỉnh; I ’dlike to meet R ita = sự hoàn chỉnh được hiểu. An infinitive phrase is not com pleted following to when the meaning is clearly understood to repeat the idea that came immediately before. Uncompleted infinitives follow die verbs in Charts 10-4 and 10-5. Cụm động từ nguyên thể không hoàn chỉnh theo sau to khi nghĩa rô ràng đuợc hiểu để lặp lại ý đứhg ngay trước đó. Các động từnguyên thể không hoàn chỉnh theo sau các động từ trong Bảng 10-4 và 10 5.

I've never met Rita, but I'd like to do.

(e) I don't want to leave, but I have to. (f) Sam doesn't go to school here, but he used to.

Uncompleted infinitives are also com m on with these auxiliaries: have to, be gomg to, used to, and ought to. Các động từ nguyên thể không hoàn chỉnh cũng thông dụng với các trợ động từ này: have to, begoừig to, used, to, và ought to.

□ EXERCISE 12: Complete th e sentences with the words in parentheses. Use anv appropriate tense. Discuss th e understood m eaning of the uncompleted infini­ tives. 1. A: Why didn't you go to the concert? B: I {want, not)

diẩK t U!ant to

2. I haven't written my parents yet this week, but I {intend) ________ _____________. 3. A: Did Jane enjoy the play? B: She {seem)________ _____________. 4. I'd like to buy fresh flowers for my desk every day, but I can't 0afford) ______________________. 5. I've never eaten at that restaurant, but I (would like) _____________________ . 6. A: Want to go to the jazz festival with us tomorrow night? B: I (would love)_____ ________________ ! FUNDAMENTALS OF EN G LISH G R A M M A R - 279

6. Sarawantedtogotoam ovie,butJam esdiđn'tw antto.Theyargued _

that.

—>Sara and James argued_____________________ to a movie. that, he should go to a barber.

7. Jake cuts his own hair. Instead - > Instead his own hair, Jake should go to a barber. 8. Mr. and Mrs. Reed have always saved for a rainy day. They believe_____ ______ that. —> Mr. and Mrs. Reed believe for a rainy day. 9. I may fall on my face and make a fool of myself. I'm worried

;________ that. a fool

on my face and

► I'm woưied

of myself when I walk up the steps to receive my diploma. 10. The children are going to go to Disneyland. They're excited_______

that.

-» The children are excited_____________________ to Disneyland. 11. Their parents are going to Disneyland, too. They are looking forward____________ that. -» Their parents are looking forward___________________

there, too.

10-8 USING B Y AND W I T H TO EXPRESS HOW SOME­ THING IS DONE D Ù N G B Y V Ả W I T H Đ Ể D IỄ N T Ả C Á C H Đ IỂ U GÌ Đ Ó ĐƯ Ợ C LÀM (a) Pat turned off the tape recorder by pushing the stop button.

By + a gerund is used to express how something is done. By + danh động từđược dùng để diễn tả cách điều gì đó được làm.

(b) Mary goes to work by bus. (c) Andrea stiưed her coffee with a spoon.

By or with followed by a noun is also used to express how something is done. By hoặc with được danh từ theo sau cũng được dùng để diễn tả cách điều gì đó được làm.

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 281

6. We satisfy our hunger

something.

7. We quench our thirst _

something.

8. I figured out what “quench" means _ 9. Alex caught my attention________

his arms in the air.

10. My dog shows me she is happy____

_________ her tail.

Complete the followmg with your own words. Use b y and GERUNDS. 11. Students show teachers they want to say som ething_____________ their hands. it

12. You can destroy bacteria in meat _ 13. You can cook an e g g _________

- it.

it-

o r _____________________ it. 14. After work, I relax __________ 15. Each of you, in your own small way, can help conserve the world's natural resources

□ EXERCISE 15: Complete the sentences with by or with. 1. I opened the door___ 2. I went to Cherryville 3. I dried the dish es___

utitk

a key.

bịỊ_

bus. a dishtowel.

4. I went from Portland to San Francisco _

train.

5. Paul dug a hole ____________ a shovel. 6. Ted drew a straight lin e _______

a ruler.

7. Is there any way you could touch the ceiling ____________ your foot? 8. Some advertisers try to reach target audiences_________ 9. Rebecca tightened the screw in the com er of her eyeglasses

mail. herfinger-

nail. 10. I called Bill “Paul” ____________ mistake. 11. The fastest way to send a copy of a piece of paper halfway around the world is fax. 12. The chef sliced the partially frozen meat into thin strip s____________ a razor-sharp knife.

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAMMAR

- 283

2. It is fun to meet new people. 3. It is easy to cook rice. 4. It is boring to spend the whole weekend in the dorm. 5. It is relaxing to take a long walk. 6. Is it difficult to learn a second language? 7. It isn't hard to make friends. 8. It is wrong to cheat during a test. 9. Is it dangerous to smoke cigarettes? 10. Is it expensive to live in an apartment? 11. It isn't easy to live in a foreign country. 12. It takes time to make new friends.

□ EXERCISE 18 - ORAL: Answer th e questions. STUDENT A: Use it + mfinitives. STUDENT B: Use gervnds. 1. Which is easier: to make money or to spend money? -> A: It ừ easier to spend money than (it ừ) to make money. -> B: Spending money is easier than making money. 2. Which is more fun: to study at the library or to go to a movie? 3. Which is more difficult: to write English or to read English? 4. Which is easier: to write English or to speak English? 5. Which is more expensive: to go to a movie or to go to a concert? 6. Which is more interesting: to talk to people or to watch people? 7. Which is more comfortable: to wear shoes or to go barefoot? 8. Which is more satisfying: to give gifts or to receive them? 9. Which is more dangerous: to ride in a car or to ride in an airplane? 10. Which is more important: to come to class on time or to get an extra hour of sleep in the morning? 11. Which is better: to light one candle or to curse the darkness?

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 285

8. People can take vacation trips to the moon. Will it be possible_____________________ within the next fifty years? 9. I usually can't understand M r. Allen. It's h ard __________________________________________________ . He talks too fast. 10. I can understand our teacher. It's e a sy ___________________________________________________________ __ 11. The guests usually wait until the hostess begins to eat. At a formal dinner party, it's customary________________________________________ After she takes the first bite, the guests also start to eat. 12. The bride usually feeds the groom the first piece o f wedding cake. It's traditional

1 0 -1 1

I N F IN IT IV E O F P U R P O S E : U S IN G IN O R D E R TO

Đ Ộ N G T ừ N G U Y ÊN T H Ể C H Ỉ M ỤC Đ ÍC H : D Ù N G I N O R D E R T O Why did you go to the post office? (a) I went to the post office because I wanted to mail a letter. (b) I went to the post office in order to mail a letter. (c) I went to the post office to mail a letter.

In order to expresses purpose. In order to diễn tả mục đích (đê).

(d) I went to the post office fo r some stamps. (e) I went to the post office to buy some stamps. (f) INCORRECT: I went to the post office for to buy some stamps. (g) INCORRECT: I went to the post office for buying some stamps.

For is also used to express purpose, but it is a preposition and is followed by a noun phrase, as in (d). For (đê) cũng được dùng để diễn tả mục đích, nhưng nó là giới từ và được cụm danh từ theo sau, như trong (d).

In order to answers the question "Why?” In order to trả lời câu hỏi “Why?” In (c): in order is frequently omitted, (a), (b) and (c) have die same meaning. Trong (c): in order thường được bỏ. (a),(b) và (c) có cùng nghĩa.

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 287

□ EXERCISE 2 2 - ORAL (BOOKS CLOSED): A nsw er “w hy-questions” in your own words. Show purpose by u sin g an infinitive p h rase or a “/or-phrase.” Example: Yesterday you turned on the TV. Why? Response: Yesterday I turned on the TV (to listen to the news, for the latest news about the earthquake, etc.). 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

You went to the supermarket. Why? You need to go to the bookstore. You went to the post office. You have to go to the library. You went to the health clinic. You reached into your pocket/purse.

7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

You came to this school. You borrowed some money from ( ...) . You stopped at the service station. You play (soccer, tennis, etc.). You had to go out last night. You're going to go to (.Chicago).

□ EXERCISE 2 3 - ORAL: Combine the given ideas to m ake sentences using in ­ finitives of purpose. Begin each o f your sentences w ith “ Yesterday I

Example: go shopping/go downtown Response: Yesterday I went downtown (m order) to go shoppmg. 1. call the dentist's office/make an appointment -> Yesterday I . . . . 2. study for a test/go to the library 3. get rid of my headache/take an aspirin 4. go to the laundromat/wash my clothes 5. have to run/get to class on time 6. go to (name o f a place)/eat lunch 7. make a reservation to go to . . . /call die travel agency 8. ask the teacher a question/stay after class 9. write a letter to my parents/ask them for some money 10. listen to a baseball game/turn on the radio 11. get a cup of coffee between classes/bOTrow somemoney from (...) 12. stand in the doorway of a store/get out of the rain while I was waiting for the bus

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 289

3. to pay his bills/money/Tom doesn't have/enough 4. for me/this tea is/hot/to drink/too 5. to eat breakfast this moming/time/I didn't have/enough 6. enough/to stay home alone/old/Susie isn't 7. too/to stay home alòne/young/Susie is 8. late/to go to the movie/for us/too/it's

□ EXERCISE 25 - ORAL: Combine th e sentences. Use too. 1. We can’t go swimming today. It's very cold. -* It's too cold (for us) to go swmmrng today. 2. I couldn't finish my homework last night. I was very sleepy. 3. This jacket is very small. I can't wear it. 4. Mike couldn't go to his aunt's housewarming party. He was very busy. 5. I live far from school. I can't walk there. 6. Some movies are very violent. Children shouldn't watch them. Combuie the sentences. Use e n o u g h . 7. I ean't reach the top shelf. I'm not that tall. -> I'm not tall enough to reach the top shelf. 8. I can't lift a horse. I'm not that strong. 9. It's not warm today. We can't go outside in shorts and sandals. 10. I didn't stay home and miss work. I wasn't reajly sick, but I didn't feel good all day. □ E X E R C IS E 2 6 : Complete the following sentences. Use INFINITIVES in the com-

pletions. 1. The weather is too cold______________________ ______________________________ 2. Timmy is two years old. He's too young_____________________________________ __ 3. Timmy isn't old enough_____________________________________ _______________ 4. That suitcase is too heavy__________________________________________________ 5. Ann isn't strong enough____________________________________________________ FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 291

□ EXERCISE 2 8 - ORAL: F orm sm all groups. M ake a list of several topics th a t can be used for a one-minute im prom ptu speech. The topics should be GERUND PHRASES. Exchange topics w ith another group. A fter your group has its topics, each m em ber in turn should give a one-minute speech to the rest o f the group. One group member should keep tim e. A fter all the speeches have been given, choose one speech from your group to be presented to the rest of the class. Examples o f topics: eating at fast-food restaurants, traveling to a foreign country, taking care of your health.

□ EXERCISE 2 9 - WRITTEN: What do you do for fun and recreation in your spare time? W rite about one or two spare-time activities that you enjoy. W hat do you do? Where? When? Why? M ention some interesting experiences. T ry to get your readers interested in doing the same ữúngs in theừ free tim e. Do you erýoy explo­ ring caves? Is playing tennis one of your passions? Have you ever gone skydiving? Maybe collecting ceramic horses is one o f your hobbies. Have you ever gone waterskiing? Do you enjoy simple pleasures such as walking in a park? Do you go jogging for recreation? Maybe watching sports on television is your way o f relaxing. It is im ­ portant for all of us to have spare-time activities that we enjoy. What are yours?

10-13 MORE PHRASAL VERBS (SEPARABLE)* T H Ê M C Á C CỤ M Đ Ộ N G TỪ (C Ó T H Ể T Á C H RA) (hẹn hò) (gọi điện thoại

ca ll o ff ...... cancel

(hủy bỗ)

.

ask o u t a sk someone to go on a date call b a c k . . . return a telephone call

lại)

call u p ......make a telephone call (gọi điện thoại) g iv e b a c k . . . return something to someone (trả lạa h a n g u p . . . . (1) hang on a hanger or a hook; (2) end ((1) gác ốngnghe điện thoại;

(2) kết thúc cuộc gọi điện thoại)

a telephone call

p a y b a c k . . . return money to someone (fro lại tiền) p u t a w a y . . . put somethmg m its usual or proper place (cất đi) p u t b a c k . . . return something to its origmal place (đặt trở ìại chỗ cũ) p u t o u t ......extinguừh (stop) a fire, a cigarette, a (dập tắt) cigar sh u t o f f ........ stop a machme or light, tom o ff {tất (máy, đèn)) tr y o n ...........put on clothmg to see if it fits (mặc thửi tu r n d o w n . . decrease the volume (vặn nhỏ ăm liprtgị tu r n u p .........increase the volume (vặn lớn âm ỉựmg) * See 9-8 and 9-9 for more information about phrasal verbs.

Xem 9-8 và 9-9 để biết thêm thông tin về cụm động từ.

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 293

9. A: You can't smoke that cigarette in the auditorium. You'd better p u t ________ before we go in. B: Okay. 10. A: Do you have any plans for Saturday night? B: Yes. I have a date. Jim Olsen asked____________________ . 11. A: Did you take my eraser off of my desk? B: Yes, but I p u t_____________________ on your desk when I was finished. A: Oh? It's not here. B: Look under your notebook. A: Ah. There it is. Thanks. 12. A: Your toys are all over the floor, kids. Before you go to bed, be sure to

p u t_________________

■

B: Okay, Daddy. 13. A: Did you go to Kathy's party last night? B: She didn't have a party. She called_______________________ . 14. A: This is a nice-looking coat. Why don't you t r y __________ __________ ? B: How much does it cost?

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 295

(e) ACTIVE:

The teacher corrects our homework. (f) PASSIVE: Our homework is corrected by the teacher. (g) ACTIVE: Mr. Lee will teach this class. (h) PASSIVE: This class will be taught by Mr. Lee.

Form of all passive verbs: Dạng của tất cả các động từ bị động: BE + PAST PARTICIPLE.

BE can be in any of its forms: am, ừ, are, was, were, has been, have been, will be, etc. BE có thể ở bất cứ dạng nào của nó: am, is, are, was, were, has been, have been, will be, V. V ...

THE PAST PARTICIPLE follows BE. For regular verbs, the past participle ends in -ed (e.g., mailed, corrected). Some past participles are irregular (e.g., taught). See Chart 2-4. PHÂN TỪQUẮ KHỨ t h e o s a il BE. Đ ố i v ớ i c á c đ ộ n g

từ có qui tắc, phân từ quá khứ tận cùng là -ed (vd: mailed, corrected). Một số phân từ quá khứ là bất qui tắc (vd: taught). Xem Bảng 2-4.

11-2 TENSE FORMS OF PASSIVE VERBS C Á C D Ạ N G THÌ C Ủ A Đ Ộ N G T Ừ BỊ Đ Ộ N G Notice that till the passive verbs are formed with BE + PAST PARTICIPLE. Lưu ý là tất cả các động từ bj động được thành lập với BE + PAST PARTICIPLE. ACTIVE

TENSE

PASSIVE

SIMPLE The news PRESENT The news The news

surprises me. surprises Sam. surprises us.

SIMPLE The news PAST The news

surprised me.

PRESENT PERFECT

FUTURE

Bob Bob

surprised us.

I Sam We

is surprised by the news. are surprised by the news.

I We

was surprised by the news. were surprised by the news.

has mailed the letter. The letter has mailed the letters. The letters

am surprised by the news.

has been mailed by Bob. have been mailed, by Bob.

The letter will be mailed by Bob. The letter is going to be mailed by Bob.

Bob will mail the letter. Bob isgom gtom ail the letter.

□ EXERCISE 1: C h a n g e the activ e v e rb s to p a ssiv e v e rb s. Write the subject of the p a ssiv e sen ten ce. 1. SIMPLE PRESENT

a. The teacher helps m e.

/

OM k c ệ ỉc d

by the teacher.

b. The teacher helpsJ a n e .

________ ______________

by the teacher.

c. The teacher helps us.

________ ______________

by the teacher.

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 297

□ EXERCISE 3: Change the sentences from active to passive. 1. Ms. Hopkins invited me to dinner.

____ / was inv-ited to dinner- ầ ỷ M s. Mop&ins.____________ 2. Thomas Edison invented the phonograph. 3. Water surrounds an island. 4. A maid will clean our hotel room. 5. A plumber is going to fix the leaky faucet. 6. A doctor has examined the sick child. 7. The police arrested James Swan. 8. A large number of people speak Spanish. 9. The secretary is going to answer the letter 10. The teacher's explanation confused Carlos. 11. My mistake embarrassed me.

12. Helicopters fascinate children. 13. Shakespeare wrote H am let* 14. This news will amaze you.

* Notice that Hamlet, the title of a play, is printed in italics. In handwritten or typed sentences, the title of a book or a play is underlined.

Lưu ý là Hamlet, tựa đề vở kịch, được in nghiêng. Trong các câu dược viết tay hay đánh máy, tựa đề một quyển sách hoặc vở kịch được gạch chân.

Printed: Tolstoy wrote War and Peace. Được in: Handwritten:

ca n celed .__________________ 2. A doctor can prescribe medicine._______________ ;_____________________________ 3. People should plant tomatoes in the spring.____________________________________ 4. Mr. Hook must sign this report._______________________________________ ______ 5. Someone may build a new post office on First Street. 6. People may not sell beer to minors.__________________________ __ 7. People can reach me at 555-3815.___________________________ ___ _____ 8. People have to place stamps in the upper right-hand com er of an envelope. 9. Someone ought to paint that fence._________________ 10. People cannot control the w eather._________________ 11. Someone had to fix our car before we left for Chicago. 12. All of the students must do the assignment.

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 309

24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30.

Someone must solve it soon. No one invited me to the party. Did someone invite you to the party? Someone built the Suez Canal in the nineteenth century. No one built the Suez Canal in the twentieth century. When did someone build the Panama Canal? Did someone build the Panama Canal in the twentieth century?

□ EXERCISE 13: Complete the sentences with the correct form of the verbs (active or passive) in parentheses. 1. This book (have to return) _____________________________ to the library today. 2. The other books (return) _____________________ yesterday. 3. That book (should return)_____________________ tomorrow. 4. These letters (be gomg to m ait)_____________________ tomorrow. 5. That letter (ought to send)_____________________ immediately. 6. This letter (must send)______________________today. 7. Those letter (arrive) ______________________yesterday. 8. I don't have my car today. It's in the garage. It (repair)

'_____________________

right now. 9. Kate didn't have her car last week because it was in the garage. While it {repair)_____________________ , she took the bus to work. 10. The mechanic (repair)________________________________ Tina's car last week. 11. Glass (m ake)_________ ___________ from sand. 12. You (should ca n y, not) ______________________ large sums of money with you. 13. Large sums of money (ought to keep) _____________________ in a bank, don't you think? to their parents

14. At our high school, the students' grades (send) four times each year.

15. I'm Sony, but the computer job is no longer available. A new computer programmer (Aire, already)_____________________ . with care. For example,

16. Household cleaning agents (must use)________________ mixing chlorine bleach with ammonia (can produce)__ gases.

_______ toxic

. in your country?

17. What products (manufacture)

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 311

11-8 USIN G PAST PARTICIPLES AS ADJECTIVES (STATIVE PASSIVE) D Ù N G PH Â N T ừ Q U Á K H Ứ LÀM T ÍN H T Ừ (D Ạ N G BỊ Đ Ộ N G Ở T R Ạ N G THÁI T lN H ) BE + ADJECTIVE (a) Paul is young. (b) Paul is tall. (c) Paul is hungry.

Be can be followed by an adjective. The adjec­ tive describes or gives information about the subject of the sentence. Tính từ có thể theo sau be. Tính từ mô tả hoặc đưa thông tin về chủ ngữ của câu.

BE + PAST PARTICIPLE (d) Paul is married. (e) Paul is tired. (f) Paul is frightened.

Be can be followed by a past participle (the pas­ sive form). The past participle is often like an adjective. The past participle describes or gives information about the subject of the sentence.

Past participles are used as adjectives in many common, everyday expressions. Phân từ quá khứ (dạng bị động) có thể theo sau be. Phân từ quá khứthường giống tính từ. Phân từ quá khứ mô tả hoặc đưa thông tin về chủ ngữ của câu. Các phân từ quá khứ được dùng làm tính từ trong nhiều thành ngữ thông dụng hàng ngày.

(g) Paul ừ married to Susan. (h) Paul was excited about the game. (i) Paul will be prepared fo r the exam.

Often die past participles in these expressions are followed by particular prepositions + an ob­ ject. Thường các phân từ quá khứ trong các thành ngữ n à y đ ư ợ c t h e o s a u b ở i c á c g iớ i t ừ đ ặ c b iệ t + tâ n n g ữ .

For example: Ví dụ:

• married is followed by to (+ an object). married được theo sau bởi to (+ tân ngũ). • exáted is followed by about (+ an object). excited được theo sau bởi about (+ tân ngữ). • prepared is followed by fo r (+ an object). prepared được theo sau bởi fo r (+ tân ngữ). SOME COMMON EXPRESSIONS WITH BE + PAST PARTICIPLE MỘT SỐ THÀNH NGỮ THÔNG DỤNG VỚI BE + PHẢN TỪ QUÁ KHỨ 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

be acquamted. (with) be bored (with, by) be broken be closed be composed o f be crowded (with)

7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

be devoted (to) be disappomted (in, with) be divorced (from) be done (with) be drunk (on) be engaged (to) FUNDAMENTALS

13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18.

be excited (about) be exhausted (from) be finished, (with) be frightened (of, by) be gone (from) be hurt

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 3 1 3

13. According to the job description, an applicant must have a Master's degree and at least five years of teaching experience. Unfortunately, I _________________________not ____________ ________ for that job. 14. This milk doesn't taste right. I think i t ____________________ . I'm not going to drink it. 15. W ater_____________________ of hydrogen and oxygen.

□ EXERCISE 16: Complete the sentences with appropriate prepositions. 1. The day before Christmas, the stores are crowded

u ith

last-minute shoppers.

2. Are you qualified_____________ that job? 3. Mr. Heath loves his family very much. He is devoted____________ them. 4. Our dog runs under the bed during storms. He's terrified______________ thunder. 5. My sister is m arried____________ a law student. 6. Are you prepared_____________ the test? 7. I'll be finished____________ my work in another minute or two. 8. Jason is excited____________ going to Hollywood. 9. Ms. Brown is opposed____________ the new tax plan. 10. Jane isn't satisfied_h er present apartment. She's looking for a new one. 11. I M e d the test because Ididn't study. I'm disappointed____________ myself. 12. Janet doesn't take good care of herself. I'm w orried_______________ her health. 13. I'm tire d ____________ this rainy weather. I hope the sun shines tomorrow. 14. In terms of evolution, a hippopotamus is related____________ a horse. 15. The students are involved____________many extracurricular activities. 16. Are you acquainted____________ this author? I think her books are excellent. 17. When will you be done ____________your work? 18. I'm starving! Right now I'm interested____________ only one thing: food. 19. The children want some new toys. They're bored____________their old ones. 20. Sam is engaged____________ his childhood sweetheart. 21. Our daughter is scared____________ dogs. 22. You've done a good job. You should be very pleased____________yourself.

□ EXERCISE 17 - ORAL (BOOKS CLOSED): Supply appropriate preposi­ tions + “someone” or “something.” Example: I'm w orried. . . . Response: about someone/something. FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAMMAR - 315

15. (qualify)

I

didn't get

the job. The interviewer said that I ___________ not

__________ _______ __ it. 16. (disappomt) My son brought home a report card with all D's and Fs. I can't understand it. I _____ _______________ him. 17. (do)

At last, I ____________________my homework. Now I can go to bed.

18. (crowd)

There are too many students in our class. The classroom

I

19. (shut)

It's starting to rain.__________ _ all of the windows______________ ?

20. (go)

Where's my wallet? I t ____________________ ! Did you take it?

11-9

P A R T IC IP IA L A D J E C T IV E S : -ED vs. -ING TÍNH Từ PHÂN TỪ: -ED đôi chiều với -ING

Indian art interests m e. (a) I am interested in Indian art. INCORRECT: I am interesting in Indian art. (b) Indian art is interesting. INCORRECT: Indian art is interested.

Th e news surprised K ate. (c) Kate was surprised.

(d) The news was surprising.

The past participle (-ed)* and die present par­ ticiple {-ing) can be used as adjectives. In (a): The past participle [interested) describes how a person feels. Phân từ quá khứ(-eđ) và phân từhiện tại (-ihg) có thể được dùng làm tính từ. Trong (a): Phân từ quá khứ (interested, (thích)) mô tả một nguời cảm thấy thế nào. In (b): The present participle interesting) de­ scribes the cause of the feeling. The cause of the interest is Indian art. Trong (b): Phân từ hiện tại (mterestmg (thú vị, hay)) mô tả nguyên nhân của cảm giác đó. Nguyên nhân của sựthú vị là nghệ thuật Ân Độ. In (c): “surprised” describes how Kate felt. The past participle carries a passive meaning: Kate was surprised, by the news. Trong (c): “surprised” (ngạc nhiên) mô tả Kate đã cảm thấy thế nào. Phân từ quá khứ mang nghĩa bị động: Kate was surprisedby the news. In (d ): “the news" was the cause of the surprise.

Trong (d): “die news” là nguyên nhân của sự ngạc nhiên. * T h e past participle o f regular verbs ends in -ed Som e verbs have irregular forms. See C hart 2-4.

P hân từ quá khứ của cá c dộng từ có qui tắc tận cùng lằ -eđ. Một số động từ có d ạ n g bấl qui tác.

Xem Bảng 2-4. FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 317

6. I read an (interesting, mterested) article in the newspaper this morning. 7. I heard some (surprising, surprised) news on the radio. 8. I'm (boring, bored). Let's do something. How about going to a movie? 9. Mr. Sawyer bores me. I think he is a (.boring, bored) person. 10. Mr. Ball fascinates me. I think he is a ựascinatừìg, fascinated) person. 11. Most young children are (Jascinatmg, fascm ated) by animals. 12. Young children think that animals are ựascinating, fascmated). 13. I was very (embarrassing, embarrassed) yesterday when I spilled my drink on the dinner table.

14. That was an (embarrassing, embarrassed) experience. 15. I read a (shocking, shocked) report yesterday on the number of children who die from starvation in the world every day. I was really (shocking, shocked). 16. The children went to a circus. For them, the circus was (exciting, excited). The {exciting, excited) children jumped up and down.

FUNDAMENTALS OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 319

3. This food is delicious, but I can't eat any more. I'm getting_____________________ . 4. I overslept this morning. When I finally woke up, I jumped out of bed, got _______________, picked up my books, and ran to class. 5. Mom and Dad are going to celebrate their 50th wedding anniversary next month. They got _____________________ fifty years ago. 6. When Jane gave us directions to her house, I g o t _____________________ . So I asked her to explain again how to get there. 7. I didn't understand Jane's directions very well, so on the way to her house last night I got __________ __________ . I couldn’t find her house. 8. Calm down! Take it easy! You shouldn't g e t _____________________ . It's not good for

9. Mr. Anderson is losing some of his hair. He's getting______ _____________ . 10. I didn't like the movie last night. It Wasn't interesting. I g o t_____________________ and wanted to leave early. 11. When's dinner? I'm getting_____________________ . 12. We should leave for the conceit soon. It's g ettin g ____________________ We should leave in the next five minutes if we want to be on time. 13.1 want to make a lot of money. Do you know a good way to g e t _____________________ quick? 14. Jake g o t_____________________ for stealing a car yesterday. He is in jail now. 15. Was it a bad accident? Did anyone g e t_____________________ ? 16. When I turned around and around in a tircle, I g o t____________. 17. I don't feel very good. I think I'm gettin g _____________________ . Maybe I should see a doctor. 18. My friends g o t_____________________ at the party Saturday night, so I drove them home in my car. They were in no condition to drive. 19. I think I'll go to bed. I'm getting_____________________ . 20. Let's stop working and take a break. I'm getting_____________________ . FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 321

□ EXERCISE 2 3 - ERROR ANALYSIS: Find and correct the errors in the following sentences. Example: I am agree with him. Correction: I agree with him. 1. 2. 3. 4. . 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.

An accident was happened at the com er yesterday. This is belong to me. I am very surprise by the news. I'm interesting in that subject. He is m any with my cousin. Thailand is locate in Southeast Asia. Mary's dog was died last week. Were you surprise when you saw him? When I went downtown, I get lost. Last night I very tire. The bus was arrived ten minutes late. When are you going to get many? I am agree with you. We are not agree with him.

11-11 U S IN G BE USED/ACCUSTOMED TO A N D G ET USED/

ACCUSTOMED TO DÙNG BE USED/ACCUSTOMED TO VÀ GET USED/ ACCUSTOMED TO (a) I am used, to hot weather. (b) I am accustomed to hot weather. (c) I am used to living in a hot climate. (d) I am accustomed to living in a hot climate.

(a) and (b) have the same meaning: “Living in a hot climate is usual and norm al for me. I'm familiar with w hat it is like to live in a hot climate. Hot weather isn't strange or different to m e.” (a) và (b) có cùng nghĩa: "Việc sống ở khí hậu nóng là bình thưởng đối với tôi. Tôi quen với việc sống ở khí hậu nóng. Thời tiết nóng không xa lạ hoặc khác đối với tôi." (đang quen (với)). Notice in (c) arid (d): to (a preposition) is followed by the -ing form of a verb (a gerund).* Luu ý trong (c) và (d): to (giới tù) được theo sau bởi dạng -ing của động từ (danh động tù).

* COMPARE: To express the habitual past (see 29), the infinitive form follows used: I used, to live

SOSÁNH: Để diễn tả quá khứ thối quen (xem 2-9), dạng động từ nguyên thể theo sau used: I

in Chicago, but now I live in New York How­ ever, be used, to is followed by a gerund: la m used to living in a big áty. NOTE: In both used to (habitual past) and be used to, ửle "d" is not pro­ nounced in "used."

used to live m Chicago, but now I live in New York. (Tôi đã từng sông ỞChicago, nhưng bây giờ tôi sông ở New York). Tuy nhiên, be used to được danh động từ theo sau: lam used to living in a big city. (Tôiđatigquensôhgở thành phốlớn). LUÚÝ: Trong cả used to (quá khứ thói quen) và be used to, không phát âm "d" trong "used."

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 323

11. (American) food 12. being on my own*

9. eating a big breakfast 10. drinking coffee in the morning

□ EXERCISE 2 6 - ORAL (BOOKS CLOSED): Answer the questions. Example: What time are you accustomed to getting up? Response: I'm accustomed to getting up (at 7:30). 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

What time are you accustomed to getting up? What time are you used to going to bed? Are you accustomed to living in (name o f thừ city)? Are you accustomed to living in a big city? Are you used to speaking English every day?

6. Who lives with a roommate? Are you accustomed to that?

7. Who lives alone? Are you accustomed to that? 8. What are you accustomed to eating for breakfast? 9. Our weather right now is hot/cold/humid/cold and wet/etc. Are you used to this kind of

weather? 10. How are you used to getting to school every day? i i . Where are you accustomed to eating lunch? 12. What time are you accustomed to eating dinner? 13. What kind of food are you accustomed to eating?

14. Who lives in a dorm? Are you used to the noise in a dorm? 15. Are you used to speaking English everyday, or does it seem strange to you?

□ EXERCISE 27: You are living in a new place (country, city, apartment, dorm, etc.) and going to a new school. W hat adju stm en ts hav e you h ad to m ake? Write about th e m by com pleting th e sentences w ith your own words. 1. I'm getting used to _______________________________________ _________________ 2. I'm also getting accustomed to _________________________________ ______________ 3. I have gotten accustomed to _____________________________________ ___________ 4. I haven't gotten used to ____________________________________ ________________ 5. I can't get used to __________________________________________ _ 6. Do you think I will ever get accustomed to _____________________________________

* To be on one's own is an idiom . It m e a n s to b e aw ay fro m o n e 's fam ily a n d resp o n sib le for o n e self.

T obeonone'sow n là đ ặ c ngữ. N ó n g h ĩa là x a g ia đ ìn h và tự c h ịu trá c h nhiệm (một mình và tự lo, tự lập).

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 325

□ EXERCISE 2 9 - ORAL: Read th e dialogues and then answer the questions. U se be supposed to. 1.

TOM'S BOSS: Mail this package.

TOM: Yes, sir. What is Tom supposed to do? —>H e ừ supposed to mad a package. 2.

MARY: Call me at nine. ANN: Okay. W hat ừ A n n supposed to âõi

3.

MS. MARTINEZ: Please make your bed before you go to school. JOHNNY: Okay, Mom. What isJohnny supposed to dóì

4.

MR. TAKADA: Put your dirty clothes in the laundry basket.

SUSIE: Okay, Dad W hat is Susie supposed to do? 5.

MRS. WILSON: BOBBY: MRS. WILSON: ANNIE:

Bobby, pick up your toys and put them away. Okay, Mom. Annie; please hang up your coat. Okay, Mom.

W hat are the children supposed to do? 6.

DR. KETTLE: You should take one pill every eight hours.

PATIENT: All right, Dr. Kettle. Anything else?

DR. KETTLE: Drink plenty of fluids. W hat is the patient supposed to do? 7.

PROF. LARSON: Read Chapter 10 and answ er the questions at th e end of the chapter.

STUDENTS: (no response) W hat are the students supposed to do? 8.

PROF. THOMPSON: Read th e directions carefully, use a No. 2 pencil, and raise your

hand if you have any questions. STUDENTS: (no response) W hat are the students supposed to đoiĩ

□ EXERCISE 3 0 - WRITTEN: Describe how a particular holiday is celebrated in your country. What is done in the morning, th e afternoon, the evening? What are some of the things th at people typically do on this holiday? NOTE: Many of your sen­ tences will be active, b u t some of them should be passive.

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 327

12-2 USING

WHO A N D WHOM IN ADJECTIVE CLAUSES DÙNG WHO VÀ WHOM TRONG MỆNH ĐỀ TÍNH NGỮ s

( a ) The man is friendly.

V

H e lives next to me.

ị w ho

i

s

V

w h o lives next to me ( b ) The man who lives next to me is friendly.

In (a): He is a subject pronoun. He refers to "the m an.” Trong (a): He là đại từ chủ ngữ. H eâề cập đến “the m an.” To make an adjective clause, we can change he to who. Who is a subject pronoun. W7io refers to “the m an.” Để thành lập mệnh đề tính ngừ, chúng ta có thể đổi he thành who. Who là đại từ chủ ngữ. Who đề cập đến “the m an.” In (b): An adjective clause immedi­ ately follows the noun it modifies. Trong (b): Mệnh đề tính ngữ theo ngay sau danh từ nó bổ nghĩa. INCORRECT:

SAI:

s ( c ) The man was friendly.

V

o

I met him.

rs

ị

------ whom

o

V

whom I met

The man ừ friendly who lives next to me. The man ừ friendly who lives next to me.

In (c): H im is an object pronoun. H im refers to the “the m an.” Trong (c): Him ià đại từ tân ngữ. Him đề cập đến “the m an.” To make an adjective clause, we can change him to whom. Whom is an object pronoun. Để thành lập mệnh đề tính ngữ, chúng ta có thể đổi him thành whom. Whom là đại từ tân ngữ. Whom refers to "the m an.”* Whom đề cập đến ‘‘the m an.” Whom comes at the beginning of an adjective clause. Whom đúng đầu mệnh đề tính ngữ.

* I n inform al English, who is o fte n u sed as a n o b ­ ject p ro n o u n in stead o f whom:

FORMAL: TRANG TRỌNG INFORMAL THÂN MẬT

The The The The

man man man man

whom whom who I who I

Trong tiếng Anh thân mật, who thường được dùng làm đại từ tân ngữ thay cho whom:

I met w as friendly. I m et w as friendly. m et was friendly. m et was friendly. FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 329

7. A misanthrope is a person ___

g.

8. A meteorologist is a person___

h. who has special knowledge in one area.

9. A jack-of-all-trades is someone . . . .

i.

who has many skills.

j.

who studies plants,

10. An expert can be defined as a person. . . .

who always puts off doing things.

□ EXERCISE 3: Complete the sentences with your own words. Consult your dictionaiy if necessary. 1. A bakerisapersonw ho___________________________________________________ _ 2. A mechanic is someone w ho____________________________________________ _ 3. A bartender is a person who________________________________________ __ _______ 4. A philatelist is someone who__________________________________________________ 5. A spendthrift is somebody w ho___________________________________________ __ 6. An astronomer is a scientist who_____________________________________________ 7. A carpenter is a person who___________________________________________________ 8. A miser is someone who________________________________________________

12-3 USING WHO, WHOM, AND TH AT IN ADJECTIVE CLAUSES D Ù N G W H O , W H O M , VÀ T H A T Ĩ R O N G M ỆN H Đ Ề TÍN H N G Ữ s

( a ) The man is friendly.

He

I

V lives next to me.

who that c V ( b ) The man who lives next to me is friendly. ( c ) The man that lives next to me is friendly.

In addition to who, we can use that as the subject of an adjective clause. Ngoài who, chúng ta có thể dùng that làm chủ ngữ của mệnh đề tính ngữ. (b) and (c) have the same meaning, (b) và (c) có cùng nghĩa. A subject pronoun cannot be om it­ ted: Đại từ chủ ngữ không được bỏ: INCORRECT:

The man lives next to

me ừ friendly. SAI: The man lives next to me is friendly. CORRECT: The man who/that lives

next to me is friendly. ĐÚNG: The mem who/that lives next to me ừ friendly. FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 331

12-4 USING

WHICH AND TH AT IN ADJECTIVE CLAUSES DÙNG WHICH v h TH AT TRONG MỆNH ĐỂ TÍNH NGỮ

Who and whom refer to people. Which refers to things. That can ( a ) The river is polluted. flows through town. refer to either people or things. Who và whom đề cập đến người. which Which đề cập đến vật. That có that thể đề cập đến hoặc người hoặc s V" vật. ( b ) The river which flows through town is polluted. In (a): To make an adjective ( c ) The river that flows through town is polluted. clause, we can change it to s It

i

which or that. It, which, and that all refer to a thing (the river). Trong (a): Để thành lập mệnh đề tính ngữ, chúng ta có thể đổi it thành which hoặc that. It, which, và th a t tất cả đều đề cập đến một vật (con sông). (b) and (c) have the same m ean­ ing. (b) và (c) có cùng nghĩa. When which and that are used as the subject of an adjective c l a u s e , t h e y CANNOT b e o m i t t e d .

Kh i which và that được dùng làm chủ ngữ của mệnh đề tính ngữ, KHÔNG ĐUỢC b ỏ c h ú n g .

s V I bought

o them. ị which that

o s \ (e ) The books which I bought were expensive. ( f ) The books that I bought were expensive. (g) The books 0 1 bought were expensive.

FUNDAMENTALS

Which or that can be used as an object in an adjective clause, as in (e) and (f). Which hoặc that có thể được dùng làm tân ngữ trong mệnh đề tính ngữ, như trong (e) và (f). An object pronoun can be omit­ ted from an adjective clause, as in (g). (e), (f) and (g) have the same meaning. Đại từ tân ngữ có thể được bỏ khỏi mệnh đề tính ngữ, như trong (g). (e), (0 và (g) có cùng nghĩa.

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 333

5. 6. 7. 8.

A hammer is a t ool . . . . A barometer is an instrum ent, A coin is a piece of metal A pyramid is a structure . . . .

e. that is square at the bottom and has four sides that come together at the top in a point. f. that is used as money, g. that permits a citizen to travel in other countries. h. that is made of flour, eggs, milk, and sugar.

12-5 SINGULAR AND PLURAL VERBS IN ADJECTIVE CLAUSES Đ Ộ N G T ừ S Ồ ÍT VÀ S Ồ N H IỀ U T R O N G M ỆN H Đ Ể TÍN H N G Ữ (a ) I know th e m a n who is sittmg In (a): The verb in the adjective clause (is) is singu­ over there. lar because who refers to a singular noun, “m an.” Trong (a): Độngtừtrong mệnh đề tính ngữ (ũ) là số ít vì who đề cập đến danh từ số ít, “m an.” ( b ) I know d ie p e o p le who are sitting over there.

In (b): The verb in the adjective clause (are) is plu­ ral because who refers to a plural noun, “people. ” Trong (b): Độngtừtrong mệnh đề tính ngữ (are) là số nh iều vì who đề cập đến danh từ số nhiều, “people.”

□ EXERCISE 7: C ứ d e th e correct w ord in parentheses. 1. The students who (is, are) in my class come from many countries. 2. I met some people who (knows, know) my brother. 3. The student who (is, are) talking to the teacher is from Peru. 4. I talked to the men who (was, were) sitting near me. 5. Do you know the people that (lives, live) in that house? 6. Biographies are books which (tells, telt) the stories of people's lives. 7. A book that (tells, tell) the story of a person's life is called a biography. 8. The woman that (Was, were) sitting in front of me at the movie was wearing a big hat. 9. The people who (was, were) standing in line to get into the theater were cold and wet. 10. Water is a chemical compound that (consừts, consist) of oxygen and hydrogen. 11. There are two students in my class who (speaks, speak) Portuguese.

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 335

□ EXERCISE 8: Combine the two sentences in each pair. Use “b.” as an acỊjective clause. Give all the possible forms of th e adjective clauses. 1. a. The movie was interesting, b. We went to it. -> The movie which we went to was interesting. -> The movie that we went to was interesting. -> The movie 0 we went to was mteresting. -» The movie to which we went was interestmg. 2. a. The woman pays me a fair salary, b. I work for her. 3. a. The man is over there, b. I told you about him. 4. a. I want to tell you about the party, b. I went to it last night. 5. a. The person is sitting at that desk. b. You should talk to her about your problem. 6. a. Alicia likes the family, b. She is living with them. 7. a. The picture is beautiful, b. Tom is looking at it. 8. a. I enjoyed the music. b. We listened to it after dinner.

□ EXERCISE 9 - ORAL: Combine the sentences, using the second sentence as an adjective clause. Practice om itting th e object pronoun (whom, which, that). Example: The hill was steep. I climbed it. Response: The hill I climbed was steep. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

I met the people. You told me about them. The bananas were too ripe. My husband bought them. The market has fresh vegetables. I usually go to it. I couldn't understand the woman. I talked to her on the phone. The scrambled eggs were cold. I had them for breakfast at the cafeteria. The office is on Main Street. Amy works in it. I had a good time on the trip. I took it to Glacier National Park. The blouse is made of silk. Mary is wearing it. The doctor prescribed some medicine for my sore throat. I went to him yesterday. FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 337

□ EXERCISE 10: Combine the two sentences into one sentence. M ake “b.” an adjective clause. Use whose. Situation: You and your friend are at a party. You are telling your friend about the people at the parly.

1. a. There is the man. b. His car was stolen. There ừ the man whose car was stolen. 2. a.

There is the woman.

b. H er cat died.

3. a. Over there is the man.

b. I'm dating his daughter.

4. a. Over there is the woman. 5. a. There is the professor. 6. a. That is the man. 7. a. That is the girl.

b. His son is an astronaut. b. I borrowed her camera.

8. a.

There is the boy.

9. a.

They are the people.

10. a. That is the couple.

b. You met her husband yesterday. b. I'm taking her course.

b. His mother is a famousmusician. b. We visited their house last month.

b. Their apartment was burglarized.

□ EXERCISE 11 - ORAL: Combine the sentences. Use whose. Example: The man called the police. His car was stolen. Response: The man whose car was stolen called the police. 1. The woman was sad. Her cat died. 2. The man is friendly. I'm dating his daughter. 3. The woman is my teacher. You met her husband. 4. The professor gives hard tests. I'm taking her course. 5. The man is very proud. His daughter is an astronaut. 6. The girl is a good friend of mine. I boưowed her camera. 7. The boy wants to be a violinist. His mother is a famous musician. 8. The people were very nice. We visited their house. 9. The couple bought new locks. Their apartment was burglarized. 10. I have a friend. Her brother is a police officer. FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 339

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16.

You introduced me to him. He helped me yesterday. I spoke to him on the phone. I called him. He answered the phone. I had dinner with him last week. He opened the door for me. I told you about him. ( . . . ) went to a movie with him last night. He gave me directions to the post office. ( . . . ) roomed with him. He visited our class yesterday. We visited his house. He helped us at the hardware store. I borrowed his pen. I met him at the party last night.

II. MAIN SENTENCE: Do you know the woman? (written on the board) Example: She is standing over there. Response: Do you know the woman who/that is standing over there? 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

( . . . ) is talking to her. Her car was stolen. ( . . . ) is going to m any her. ( . . . ) is talking about her. She is waving at us. Her apartment was burglarized. She works in that office. She is sitting over there. My brother is engaged to her. Her son was arrested by the

III. MAIN SENTENCE: The movie

police.

wasgood. (written on the board)

Example: I saw it yesterday. Response: The movie (which/that) I saw yesterday was good. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

We went to it. I watched it on TV last night. ( . . . ) told me about it. It was playing at (name o f a local theater). ( . . . ) saw it. It starred (name o f an actorI actress).

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAMMAR

□ EXERCISE 16 - WRITTEN: Com plete th e senten ces w ith y o u r own words. (Use your own paper.) 1. My friend knows a man who . . . .

7. The people w h o se___

2. I have a friend whose . . . .

8. Do you know the woman who . . . ?

3. I returned the book t h a t . . . .

9. The book I . . . .

4. The person who . . . .

10. The person to whom . . . .

5. The people I . . . .

11. One of the places I . . . .

6. The movie we' . . . .

12. Some of the things I . . . .

□ EXERCISE 17 - WRITTEN: Im ag in e th a t you are in a room ftill o f people. You know everyone w ho is there. I (your reader) know no one. Tell m e w ho th ese people are. W rite your description of th e se people. P ractice u sin g adjective clauses. B eg in y o u r co m p o sitio n w ith: I'm glad y o u came. Let me tell yo u about the people who are here. The woman who . . . .

12-8 MORE PHRASAL VERBS (SEPARABLE)* .

THÊM CÁ C CỤM ĐỘNG Từ (CÓ TH Ể TÁCH RA) c ro ss o u t draw a Ime through

(gạch bỏ)

do o v e r ....do agam

(làm lạt)

.

fill i n .................. complete a sentence by writing in a blank (điền vào chẽ trống) fill o u t ................write mformation m a form (e.g., an ap(điền thông tín vào tờ đơn) plication form) fill u p f ill completely with gas, water, coffee, (đổ đầy ga, mức, cà phê etc. v.v) fin d o u t ............. discover information (khám phá) g iv e u p ............. quit dorng somethmg or quit trymg (từ bỏ, đầu hàng)

(bỏ) (bắt đầu lại) (phá sập)

te a r o f f ............. detach, tear along a dotted or perforated lừie te a r o u t o f . . . . remove a piece o f paper from a book or notebook te a r u p . . . . . . tear mto small pieces

ịxératheo hàng đuợc đánh dấu châm) {xé gmy khỏi quyền sách hay quyền vở) (xé nhỏ)

.

leav e o u t . . . . . omit start o v e r start again te a r dow n . . . . destroy a buildmg

* See 9-8 and 9-9 for more information about phrasal verbs.

Xem 9-3 và 9-9 để biết thêm thông tin về các cụm động từ.

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 343

12-9 MORE PHRASAL VERBS (NONSEPARABLE)* T H Ê M C Á C CỤ M Đ Ộ N G T Ừ (K H Ô N G T H Ể T Á C H RA) (a ) Last night some friends d ro p p ed in.

In (a): drop in is not followed by an object.

Trong (a): drop m không được tân ngữ theo sau. ( b ) Let's d ro p in on Alice this after­ noon. Let's d ro p in on her this afternoon.

In {by. drop in on is followed by an object. Trong (b): drop in on được tân ngữtheo sau. Some phrasal verbs are three-word verbs when they are followed by an object. These

verbs are nonseparable. Một số cụm động từ là động từ có ba từ khi chúng được tân ngữ theo sau. Các động từ này không thể tách ra. -Jirop in (o n )............. dro p out (of) ...........

fool a r o u n d (w ith ). .. get a lo n g (w ith )... , get b a c k (from) . .. g e t th ro u g h (with) . .. grow up (in) ........... .. lo o k out (fo r)........... .. ru n out (o f).............. ,. w atch out (for) ,.

vừit without calling first or without an mvitation stop attending (school) have fu n while wastmg từne have a good relationship with return from (a trip) finish become an adult be careful firnsh the supply o f (something) be careful

* See 9-8 and 9-9 for more information about phrasal verbs.

(ghé tạt vào thăm) (bỏ họcì {làng nhàng) (hòa thuận) (trở về) (hoàn tất) (trưởng thành) (cẩn thận, coi chừng) (cạn, hết) (cẩn thận, coi chừng)

Xem 9-8 và 9-9 để biết thêm thông tin về các cụm động từ.

□ EXERCISE 19: Complete th e phrasal verbs. 1. Look

Out

2. Look

Out

! There's a car coming! ệop

that car!

3. Where did you grow ____________ ? 4. I g rew _________________________ Springfield. 5. I couldn't finish the examination. I r a n _______ _________________ time. 6. A: What did you do yesterday? B: Nothing much. I just fooled _____________________ .

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 345

CHAPTER

13

Comparisons Các dạng so sánh □ EXERCISE 1 - ORAL: Use th e given w ords to m ake com parisons. 1. short/long lines (Compare the lengths of the lines.) line A line B line c line D line E

____________________ _____________________________ __________________ ____________ ___________

-» Line c ừ shorter than Imes A and B . B is the longest tine o f all. -» c isn't as long as A . -* (contmue to make comparisons) 2. happy/sad look on his face

CpẬ

DAVID 3. large/small country (in total land area) Brazil: 3,286,488 sq. mi. (8,511,965 sq k Egypt: 385,229 sq. mi. (997,739 sq km) Spain: 194,897 sq. mi. (504,782 sq km) Canada: 3,553,303 sq. mi. (9,203,054 sq km) 4. easy/difficult question FIRST QUESTION: What's 2 plus 2? SECOND QUESTION: What's th e square tt THIRD QUESTION: W hat’s 3 tim es 127? FOURTH QUESTION: W hat's 2 plus 3?

of 937 divided by 16?

5. good/bad handwriting EXAMPLE A:

-f'U * l.u /J tM j Ịị/m+ .

EXAMPLE B:

-ÌẬ.Ị fltiltk ig -

EXAMPLE C:

j L

đf

ỊỄttỈMỆ- A-hd t' ok a iffk t

' __-___

L__

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 347

□ EXERCISE 2 - ORAL: M ake com parisons u sin g as . . . as. 1. Rita is very busy. Jason is very busy. -> Rita is . . . (jtist) as busy as Jason (is). 2. Rita is not very busy at all. Jason is very, very busy. -» Rita is n 't. . . (nearly) as busy as Jason (is). 3. I was very tired. Susan was very tired. -> I w a s___ 4. Adam wasn't tired at all. Susan was very tired. -> Adam w asn 't. . . . 5. My apartment has two rooms. Po's apartment has two rooms, (use big) 6. My apartment has two rooms. All's apartment has three rooms, (use big) 7. My apartment has two rooms. Anna's apartment has six rooms, (use big) 8. Compare the fullness of the glasses, (use fuU)

□ EXERCISE 3: U sing th e given w ords, com plete th e sentences w ith a s ... as. U se a negative verb if appropriate. A * 0J(( ỈSH t () Q.S

1. ahouseflvlanant 2. honevlsuear

H one# is iM S t ) OS

sweet as

saỷOi*.

patient as

4. adultslchilởen

bie as dangerous and wild as

6. a lionịa tiser

large as

7. a salaxvia solar system 8. the Atlantic Ocean!the Pacific Ocean* 9. monkevslpeople

đ kou.g&0Ịj/

important as

3. healthlmonev 5. a lake/a sea

big as

deep as agile in climbine trees as

* Maximum depths: Atlantic = approx. 30,000 feet/9000 meters. Pacific = approx. 36,000 feet/11,000 meters. FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 349

7. Nicole felt very embarrassed. She turned as red a s_________ 8. I tend to be a little messy, but my roommate is as neat a s ____ 9. When Erica received the good news, she felt as high a s_____ 10. How can anyone expect me to sleep in this bed? It's as hard as

13-2 COMPARATIVE AND SUPERLATIVE DẠNG SO SÁNH HƠN VÀ s o SÁNH c ự c CẦP (a) “A” is older than “B.” (b) “A” and “B” are older than “C” and “D." ( c ) Ed is more generous than his brother.

The comparative compares “this/these” to “that/those.” Form: -er or more. (See Chart 13-3.) Dạng so sánh hơn so sánh “this/these” với “that/those”. Dạng: -er hoặc more. (Xem Bảng 13-3).

(d) “A”, “B”, “C", and “D” are sisters. “A” is the oldest o f all four sisters. (e) A woman in Turkey claims to be the oldest person m the world. ( f) Ed is the most generous per­ son m his family.

The superlative compares one part of a whole group to all the rest of the group. Form: -est or most. (See Chart 13-3 for forms.) Dạng so sánh cực cấp so sánh một phần trong toàn nhóm với tất cả cái/người còn lại của nhóm. Dạng: -est hoặc most. (Xem Bảng 13-3 về các dạng.)

A comparative is followed by than. Lull Ý: Dạng so sánh hơn được than theo sau.

NOTICE:

NOTICE: A superlative begins with the. LU(J Ý: Dạng so sánh cực cấp bắt đầu với the.

□ EXERCISE 6 - ERROR ANALYSIS: All of th e following sentences contain errors. Find and correct the mistakes. 1. Alaska is large than Texas. ->

AểcLsiữ. is ểarỷer than Terns.

2. Alaska is largest state in the United States. 3. Texas is the larger from France in land area. 4. Old shoes are usually more comfortable that new shoes. 5. My running shoes are the more comfortable shoes I own. 6. My running shoes are more comfortable as my boots. 7. Mr. Molina writes the most clearly than Ms. York. 8. English is the most widely used language from the world. 9. I have one sister and one brother. My sister is younger in the family. 10. Mark's knife was as sharper from a razor blade. 11. I like Chinese food more better than French food. FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 351

ADJEC­ important more important the most important More and most are used TIVES fascinating more fascinating the most fascinating with long adjectives. WITH Dùng more và most với THREE các tính từ dài. OR MORE SYLLABLES IRREGU­ LAR ADJEC­ TIVES

good bad

-LY ADVERBS

ONE-

SYLLABLE

better worse

the best the worst

Good and bad have ir­ regular comparative and superlative forms. Good và bad có các dạng so sánh hơn và so sánh cực câ'p bất qui tắc.

carefully

more carefully

the most carefully

slowly

more slowly

the most slowly

More and most are used wi th adverbs that end in -ly.* Dùng more và most với các trạng từtận cùng là -ly.

fast hard

faster harder

the fastest the hardest

well badly

better worse

the best the worst

far

farther/further** the farthest/furthest

The -er and -est forms are used with onesyllable adverbs. Dùng dạng -er và -est với các trạng từ có một âm tiết.

ADVERBS

IRREGU­ LAR ADVERBS

* Exception: early is both an adjective and an adverb. Forms-, earlier, earliest. ** Bothfarther and further are used to compare physical distances: I walked fartherịfurther than my friend dii Further (but not farther) can also mean "additional": I need further in­

formation.

Ngoại lệ: early vừa là tính từ vừa là trạng từ. Các dạng: earlier, earliest. Dùng cả farther và further để so sánh các khoang cách thể chất: I walked fartherỊfurther than my friend did. Further (chứ không phải farther) cũng có thể có nghĩa là "thêm": Ineed

further information. (Tôi cần thêm thông tin.)

□ EXERCISE 7: Give th e COMPARATIVE and SUPERLATIVE forms of tile following adjectives and adverbs. 1. high —>

hiỷỉie&t

4. slowly

2. careful

5. active

3. slow

6. funny

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 353

13-4 U SIN G COMPARATIVES D Ù N G D Ạ N G s o S Á N H HƠN (a) I'm older than my brother (is). (b) I'm older than he is. (c ) I'm older than him. (mformat)

In formal English, a subject pronoun (e.g., he) follows than, as in (b). In everyday, informal spoken English, an object pronoun (e.g., him) often follows than, as in (c). Trong tiếng Anh trang trọng, đại từ chủ ngữ(vd: he) theo sau than, nhưtrong (b). Trong tiếng Anh nói thân mật hàng ngày, đại từ tân ngữ (vd: hừrù thường theo sau than, như trong (c).

(d) He works harder than I do. (e) I arrived earlier than they did.

Frequently an auxiliary verb follows the subject after than. In (d): than I do = than I work. Thường trợ động từ theo sau chủ ngữ sau than. Trong (d): thanlđo = thanlwork.

( f ) Tom is much/a lot/far older than I am.

Very often modifies adjectives and ad­ verbs: e.g., Tom is very old. He drives very carefully. However, very is NOT used to modify comparative adjectives and adverbs. Instead, they are often modified by much, a lot, orfa r, as in (f) and (g). Another com m on modifier is a little!a little bit, as in (h). Very thường bổ nghĩa tính từ và trạng từ vd: Tom ừ very old. H e drives very care­ fully. Tuy nhiên, very KHÔNG được dùng để bổ nghĩa các tính từ và trạng từ so sánh hơn. Thay vào đó, chúng thường được bổ nghĩa bởi much, a lot, hoặc fa r, như trong (f) và (g). Từ bổ nghĩa thông dụng khác là a little/a little bit, như trong (h).

INCORRECT: Tom is very older than I am.

(g) Ann drives much/a lot/far more carefully than she used to. (h) Ben is a little (bit) older than me.

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 355

5. An airplane is fast. 6. Taking an airplane is faster than hitchhiking. 7. You can live more inexpensively in student housing than in a rented apartment. 8. You can live inexpensively in student housing.

□ EXERCISE 11 - ORAL: All of the following sentences contain not as ... as. If possible, change them to sentences with th e sam e meaning using less. 1. I don't live as close to my brother as I do to my sister. -» (no change using less) 2. I don’t visit my brother as often as I visit my sister. —> I visit m y brother less often than I visit m y sister. 3. George isn't as nice as his brother. 4. George isn't as generous as his brother. 5. I'm not as eager to go to the circus as the children are. 6. A notebook isn't as expensive as a textbook.

7. Wood isn’t as hard as metal. 8. Some people think that life in a city isn't as peaceful as life in a small

town.

9. The moon isn't nearly as far from the earth as the sun is. 10. I don't travel to Europe on business as frequently as I used to.

□ EXERCISE 12: Complete the following with comparatives by using morel-er or less, as appropriate. Use the words in parentheses plus your own words. 1. This test wasn't hard. It was a lot (difficult) 2. Dr. Lee's tests are far ( difficult)

ềess (ùệệiũa.Ế tkojj th e ễ a st te s t,

more* (ù^ệỉũu.ểt tkdK V r . S o rto n If t& sts,

3. A piano is a lot (heavy)________________________________________ _ 4. To me, science is much (interesting) ________________________________________ 5. Saltwater is (dense)_______________________________________________________ 6. People are far (intelligent) ____________________________________ ____________ 7. Fish are considerably Íintelligent) _______________________________________ ___ 8. She rarely comes to see us. She visits us much (frequently) ___________________ 9. When you're hot and tired, nothing is (refreshing) _____________________________ 10. In my life, I have always tried to help those who are (fortunate) ________________

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 357

1. A city has

MOW tr a g i c

2. Sunlight is much

than a small town.

èM ỷkter-

than moonlight.

3. Did you know that a laser bum s billions of times

more

than the light at

the sun's surface? 4. There is

about geography in an encyclopedia than (there is) in

a dictionary. 5. I used to be sad, but now I'm a lot

about my life (than I used to be).

•___________

________________ if they learn

6. Unhappy roommates or spouses can live together to respect each other's differences.

7. She's had a miserable life. I hope she finds_____________________ in the future. 8. I made _____________________ on the last test than (I did) on the first one, so I got a worse grade. 9. My daughter Annie is trustworthy and mature. She behaves m u c h _________________ than my nephew Louie. 10. A twelve-year-old h a s _____________________ at home and in school than a nine-yearold. 11. My son i s _____________________ about doing his homework than his older sister is. 12. A rabbit is

than a turtle.

13. This soup doesn't taste quite right. I think it needs just a little___ 14. Health care in rural areas is poor. We n e e d ________________

to treat people in

rural areas. 15. At present, approximately two-fifths of the world's population can speak English. Eng­ lish is taught t o _____________________ in the world than any other language is or ever has been.

13-6 REPEATING A COMPARATIVE L Ặ P LẠI MỘT D Ạ N G ( a) Because he was afraid, he walked faster and faster. (b) Life in the modem world is becoming more and more complex.

so

SĂNH

Repeating a comparative gives ihe idea that something becomes progressively greater, i.e., it increases in intensity, qua­ lity, or quantity. Lặp lại một dạng so sánh nêu ý là điều gì đó càng lúc càng lớn hơn, nghĩa là, nó gia tăng về cưởng độ, chất lượng, hoặc số lượng. (càng lúc càng ...)

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 359

(e) A: B: ( f ) A: B:

Should we ask Jenny and Jim to the party too? Why not? The more, the merrier. When should we leave? The sooner, the better.

The more, the merrier and the sooner, the better are two com mon expressions. The more, the merrier (càng đông càng vuií và the sooner, the better (càng sớm càng tốt) là hai thành ngữ thông dụng. In (e): It is good to have more people at the party. Trong (e): Có thêm người ở buổi tiệc là điều tốt. In (f): It is good if we leave as soon as we can. Trong (f): Nếu chúng ta đi càng sớm càng tốt.

□ EXERCISE 16: Combine the ideas in the parentheses into a DOUBLE COMPARA­ TIVE. You need to decide which of the two given ideas should come first in the com­ parison to m ake a logical statement. 1. (I became bored. He talked.) I met a man at a party last night. I tried to be interested in what he was saying, but the . . . more he talked, the more bored I became. 2. (I waited long. I got angry.) My friend told me that she would pick me up at the corner at seven o'clock. By seventhirty, she still hadn't come. The . . . . 3. (You understand more. You are old.)

There are many advantages to being young, but the . . . . 4. (She drove fast. I became nervous.) Erica offered to take me to the airport, and I was grateful. But we got a late start, so on the way she stepped on the accelerator. I got more than a little uncomfortable. The . . . .

5. (He thought about his fa m ily. H e became homesick.) Pierre tried to concentrate on his studying, but his mind would drift to his family and his home. The . . . .

6. (W e ran fa s t to reach the house. The sky grew dark.) A storm was threatening. The . . . . 7. (/ became confused. I thought about it.) At first I thought I'd understood what she'd said, but then the . . . . 8. (The air is polluted. The chances o f developing respiratory diseases are great.) Pollution poses many dangers. For example, the . . . . FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 361

□ E X E R C IS E 18: Use SUPERLATIVES o f the given words and your own words to

complete the sentences. 1. bad 2. popular

s&a. M on ster#

is the

w orst

movie

/

se&(

.

T h e _____________________sport in _____________________ i s _____________________ .

3. large

T h e _____________________city in _____________________ i s _____________________ .

4. good

_____________________is th e _____________________ restaurant i n _____________________.

5. good

One ofth e ___________________ places to eat in ___________________ i s _____________________ .

6. f a m o u s _____________________ is one of th e _____________________people in 7. hot

There are several hot months, b u t_____________________ is usually the _____________________of all.

8. valuable

T h e _____________________thing I have i s _____________________ .

9. important

The three

10. serious

_____________ things in life a r e ___________________ .

T h e _____________________ problems i n _____________________ today a r e ___

_____

□ EXERCISE 19 - ORAL: Compare the items in each list using the given words. U se as . . . as, th e COMPARATIVE (-er/more), a n d th e SUPERLATIVE (-est/most).

Example: roads in this city: wideI narrow I busy Idangerous Responses: First Avenue is wider than Market Street. Second Avenue is nearly as wide as First Avenue. First Avenue is narrower than Interstate Highway 70. Highway 70 is the widest of all the roads in this city. It is also the busiest. Usually First Avenue is busier than Market Street. The most dangerous street in the city is Olive Boulevard. Etc. 1. a lemon, a grapefruit, and an orange: sweet/sourllargelsmall 2. this book, that book, and that book: thừiỊfa t I interesting! useful!good/bad

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAMMAR -

363

( j ) She is the same age as my mother. My shoes are the same size as yours.

A noun may come between the same and as, as in (j). Danh từ có thể đứng giữa the same và as, như trong (j).

(k) My pen is like your pen. (1) My pen and your pen are alike.

Notice in (k) and (1): Lưu ý trong (k) và (1): novn + be like + noun danh từ + be like + danh từ (giôhg) noun and noun + be alike danh từvầ danh từ+ be alike (giống nhaứị

(m) She looks like her sister. It looks like rain. It sounds like thunder. This material feels like silk. That smells like gas. This chemical tastes like salt. Stop acting like a fool. He seems like a nice fellow.

In addition to following be, like also fol­ lows certain verbs, primarily those deal­ ing with the senses. Notice the examples in (m). Ngoài việc theo sau be, like cũng theo sau các động từ nào đó, chủ yếu là các động từ liên quan tới giác quan. Luli ý các ví dụ trong (m).

(n) The twins look alike. We think alike. Most four-year-olds act alike. My sister and I talk alike. The little boys are dressed alike.

Alike may follow a few verbs other than be. Notice the examples in (n). A like có thể theo sau vài động từ khác be. Luu ý các ví dụ trong (n).

□ EXERCISE 20: U setíìesam e (as), similar (to), different (from ), lữce, andaỉữceừi th e following. T here m ay b e m ore th a n one possible response in som e of th e sen ­ tences. U se w hatever response sounds best to you. 1. Jennifer and Jack both come from Rapid City. In other words, they come from tk c same, 2. Thiscitvis

town. t/w sam& as!SÌMÌểar to! UK/t

mv hometown. Both are quiet and conser­

vative. mine.

3. You and I don't aeree. Your ideas are 4. Eric never wears

clothes two days in a row.

5. Ants are fascinating. An ant colony is

lettuce. But cabbage and let-

6. In terms of shape, cabbage looks tuce don't taste

a well-disciplined army.

'_________________ .

7. A male mosquito is n o t _____________________ size____________ a female mosquito. The female is larger. FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 365

□ EXERCISE 2 2 - ORAL: Before you come to class, prepare statem ents of com­ parison and contrast on th e following topics. Be inventive, original, and specific. Pre­ pare at least three statem ents on each topic to share with the rest of the dass. Topics: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Language Food Seasons of the year Children/adults Sports

□ EXERCISE 2 3 - WRITTEN: Following are topics for writing. Compare and contrast 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Being single and being manned. Cities you have lived in or have visited. Different schools you have attended. Your way of life before and after you became a parent. Yourself now to yourself ten years ago. Your country now to your country 100 years ago. Life today to life 100 years from now.

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAMMAR

- 367

s V o n 1 11 s V 1 ( c ) I know w h e re h e lives.

A noun clause has its own subject and verb. Mệnh đề danh từ có chủ ngữ và động từ riêng của nó.

(d ) I

A noun clause can begin with a question word. (See 14-2.) Mệnh đề danh từ có thể bắt đầu bằng từ hỏi. (Xem 14-2).

know w h e r e h e lives. (noun clause)

( e ) I don't know if h e is m a r r ie d (.noun clause)

In (c): he is the subject of the noun clause; lives is the verb of the noun clause. Trong (c)' he là chủ ngữ của mệnh đề danh từ; lives là động từ của mệnh đề danh từ.

A noun clause can begin with i f or whether. (See 14-4.) Mệnh đề danh từ có thể bắt đầu với i f hoặc whether. (Xem 14-4).

( f ) 1know th a t th e w o rld is ro u n d . A noun clause can begin with that. (See 14-5.) Mệnh đề danh từ có thể bắt đầu với that. (Xem (noun clause) 14-5.)

14-2 N O U N CLAUSES THAT BEGIN W ITH A QUESTION WORD M Ệ N H Đ Ế D A N H T Ừ BẮ T ĐÂ U VỚI TỪ HỎI The following question words can be used to introduce a noun clause: when, where, why, how, who, whom, what, which, whose. Các từ hỏi sau đây có thể được dùng để giới thiệu mệnh đề danh từ when, where, why, how, who, whom, what, which, whose.

INFORMATION QUESTIONS Where does he live? When did they leave? What did she. say? Why is Tom absent?

NOUN CLAUSES (a) (b) (c) (d)

Notice in the examples: Question word order is NOT used in a noun clause. LiAj ý trong các ví dụ này: Trật

I don’t know where he lives. Do you know when they left? tự từ c ủ a c â u h ỏ i KHÔNG đ ư ợ c Please tell me what she said. dùng trong mệnh đề danh từ. I wonder why Tom is absent INCORRECT: I know where does he live. SAI: I know where does he live. CORRECT: I know where he lives. ĐÚNG: I know where he lives.

□ EXERCISE 1: Complete the sentences by changing the questions to noun clauses.

1. Where didPaul go? Ĩ don't know_____ ukcfc Pa.u.ểwent,__________________ FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 369

9.

W hy did you say that? I don't understand________

10. Where can I catch the bus? Could you please tell me 11. Who broke the window? Do you know ____________ 12. Who did Sara mvite? I don't know _______________ 13. How long has Ted been living here? Do you know _________ 14. W hat time is flight 677 supposed to arriveĨ Can you tell m e . 15. W hy is Yoko angry? Do you know _____________________

14-3 N O U N CLAUSES W ITH

W H O , W H A T, W H O SE + B E

M ỆN H Đ Ể D A N H TỪ VỚI W H O , W H A T : W H O S E + B E NOUN CLAUSE

QUESTION V

Who ^

s

s ]that boy?1

V

s

Whose pen ^1? 'thừ?1

V

(a) I don't know who ^ứiat òoy

s

V

(b) I don't know whose pen 1this1lisJ

A noun or pro­ noun that fol­ lows main verb be in a question comes in front of be in a noun clause, as in (a) and (b). A pre

positional phrase (e.g., m the office) does NOT come in s V s V 1Whose p en 1^ on the desk? (d) I don't know1whose pen1is on the desk. front of be in a noun clause, as in (c) and (d). Danh từ hoặc đại từ theo sau động từ chính be trong câu hỏi đứng trước be trong mệnh đề danh từ, như trong (a) và (b). Cụm giới từ (vd: ừi the office) KHÔNG đứng trước be trong mệnh đề danh từ, như trong (c) và (d).

s

s

V

'WTio1^1? in the office?

(c) I don't know

FUNDAMENTALS

V

in the office.

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 371

17. Who broke that window? 18. Who did ( . . . ) call last night? 19. What happened in (Brazil) yesterday?

5. How old is ( . . . ) ? 6. Where does ( . . . ) live? 7. Where does ( . . . ) eat lunch? 8. What is ( . . . )'s last name? 9. Why does ( . . . ) go downtown every day? 10. What time does ( . . . ) usually get up? 11. Why did ( . . . ) go downtown yester­ day? 12. When did ( . . . ) get home last night? 13. What time did ( . . . ) go to bed last night? 14. What time is it? 15. What time does ( . . . ) eat dinner? 16. How long has ( . . . ) been living here?

20. 21. 22. 23.

What did ( . . . ) eat for breakfast? Who wrote (W ar and Peace)? Who did ( . . . ) see yesterday? What caused the earthquake in (Iran)?

24. What causes earthquakes? 25. Who is that girl? 26. Who are those people? 27. 28. 29. 30.

Whose (backpack) is that? Whose (gloves) are those? What kind of tree is that? What kind of car does ( . . . ) have?

□ EXERCISE 5 - ORAL (BOOKS CLOSED): STUDENT A: Change the noun clause to a question. STUDENT B: Answer the question. Example: TEACHER TO A: STUDENT A: STUDENT B:

Ask ( . . . ) where ( . . . ) lives. Toshi, ask Ingrid where Mustafa lives. Ingrid, where does Mustafa live? I don't know where Mustafa lives. OR: Mustafa lives in Reed Hall.

1. Ask ( . . . ) where ( .

. ) ate breakfast this morning.

2. Ask ( . . .) what ( . .

)'s favorite color is.

3. Ask ( . . . ) when ( . . . ) got up this morning. 4. Ask ( . . . ) why ( . . . ) isn't sitting in his/her usual seat today. 5. Ask ( . . . ) how ( . . . ) got to class today. 6. Ask ( . . . ) who ( . . . ) lives with. 7. Offer ( . . . ) this (candy bar) and that (candy bar). Ask him/her which one he/she wants. 8. Ask ( . . . ) what time it is. 9. Ask ( . . . ) what kind of watch ( . . . ) has. 10. Ask ( . . . ) why ( . . . ) didn't come to dass yesterday. 11. Ask ( . . . ) who ( . . . )'s best friend is. 12. Ask ( . . . ) where ( .

. ) went after class yesterday. FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 373

14-4 N O U N CLAUSES W HICH BEGIN W ITH IF OR WHETHER* MỆNH ĐẾ DANH TỪ BẮT ĐÂU VỚI IF HOẶC WHETHER YES/NO QUESTION Is Eric at home? Does the bus stop here? Did Alice go to Chicago?

When a yes/no ques­ tion is changed to a (a) 'i1'don’t know1*1If Eric ừ a t home} noun dause, if is usu­ ally used to introduce (b ) Do you know i f the bus stops here? the clause. ( c ) I wonder if Alice went to Chicago. Khi câu hỏi yes/no duợe đổi thành mệnh đề danh từ, thuờng dùng i f để giối thiệu mệnh đề.

NOUN CLAUSE s V

o

(d) I don't know i f Eric is at home or not.

W hen if introduces a noun clause, the expression or not frequently comes at the end of the clause, as in (d). Khi i f giới thiệu mệnh đề danh từ, thành ngữ or not thưòng đứng cuối mệnh đề, như trong (d).

(e) I don't know whether Eric is at home. ( f ) I don't know whether Eric ừ at home or not. (g) I don't know whether or not Eric is a t home.

In (e): whether has the same meaning as if. Trong (e): whether có cùng nghĩa như ifIn (f): or not can come at the end of the noun clause. Trong (f): or not có thể đứng cuối mệnh đề danh từ. In (g): or not can come immediately after whether. Trong Cg); or not có thể đứng ngay sau whether. (NOTE: or not cannot come immedi­ ately after if.) (LUUỶ: or not không thể đứng ngay sau if-)

* See Chart 15-5 for the use of if and whether with ask in reported speech.

Xem Bảng 15-5 về cách dùng i/và whether với ask trong câu tường thuật.

%

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 375

17. Are we gomg to have a test tomorrow? Let's ask the teacher________________ 18. Is there a Santa Claus? The little boy wants to know

19. Who is that man? I'm going to ask Nicole____ 20. Is that man a teacher? I'm going to ask Nicole

□ EXERCISE 10 - ORAL (BOOKS CLOSED): Make sentences with noun clauses. Begin your response w ith “I wonder . . . Example: Did ( . . . ) go to the bank? Response: I wonder if ( . . . ) went to the bank. Example: Where did ( . . . ) go? Response: I wonder where ( . . . ) went. 1. Why is ( . . . ) absent today? 2. Where is ( . . . ) ? 3. Is ( . . . ) sick? 4. Will it (snow) tomorrow? 5. Will the weather be nice tomorrow? 6. Is ( . . . ) going to be in class tomorrow? 7. How long has ( . . . ) been living here? 8. Did ( . . . ) go to the library last night? 9. How much does (a Rolls Royce) cost? 10. Where did ( . . . ) go last night?

11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20.

Who lives in that house? Who is that woman? Is that woman a teacher? Whose (book) is that? Whose (gloves) are tho9e? Whose (pen) is that? Whose (papers) are those? Did ( . . . ) study last night? Does ( . . . ) have a car? How far is it to (St. Louis)?

□ EXERCISE 11: Change the questions to noun dauses. 1. Will it ram tomorrow?

I wonder

t ệ i t toiểểrn/K tomorrow.

2. W hat ừ an amphibian? Do you know_____________________________________________ 3. Is a frog an amphibian? Can you tell m e___________________________________________ 4. W hat's on T V tonight? I wonder '_______________________________________________ FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 377

Example: Does ( . . . ) live in the dorm? STUDENT A: Do you know if ( . . . ) lives in the dorm? STUDENT B: No, I don't. I don't know whether or not ( . . . ) lives in the dorm. Example: Where does ( . . . ) live? STUDENT A: Do you know where ( . . . ) lives? STUDENT B: N q I don't. I don't know where ( . . .) lives. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

9. Why is ( . . . ) absent today? 10. Is (the library) open on Sundays?

Does ( . . . ) have (a car)? Who is (that woman)? Can ( . . . ) sing? What does “gossip” mean? What time does the mail come? Is the mail here yet? Does ( . . . ) have a job? Is ( . . . ) married?

11. 12. 13. 14.

What time does (the bookstore) close? Does ( . . . ) speak (language)? What kind of (car) does ( . . . ) have? Is ( . . . ) planning to take another Eng­

lish course? 15. Is there a pay phone in this building?

□ EXERCISE 13 - ORAL: A nsw er th e questions u sin g th e given words. QUESTION 1: What do you know? a. where -> STUDENT A: I know where Madagascar is located. STUDENT B: I know where ( . . . )'s dictionary is. STUDENT C: I know where my parents got married. STUDENT D: I know where the Blueberry Cafe is. STƯDENT E: etc b. what c. why d. who QUESTION 2: What do you NOT know? a. where -> STUDENT A: I don't know where Madagascar is located. STUDENT B: etc.

b. if c. why

d. who QUESTION 3: What do you want to know?

QUESTION 4: What do you wonder?

a. b. c. d.

a. b. c. d. e. Ỉ.

if when what who

why if what who how whether

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 379

□ EXERCISE 14: Complete th e sentences with the clauses in the list or with your Dwn words. Use that to introduce the clause, or omit that if you wish. A ll people are equal. Flying in an airplane is safer than riding in a car. He always twừls his mustache when he's nervous. High school students m the United States đon 't study as hard as the students in m y country do. A huge monster was chasing me. I should study tonight. I will get married someday. S I will have a peanut butter sandwich. John "Cat M a n ” Sm ith stole Mrs. Adams's jewelry. Mora than half o f the people in the world go hungry every day. People are pretty muck the same everywhere. Plastic trash kills thousands o f marine anừnaỉs every year. 1.

I'm hungry. I guess

f

tkữí) ỉ ttìiểể/tC

U H , CL

p&Mnt buttes' SQjfdu/iok-__________

2. I have a test tomorrow. I suppose____________________________________________ , but I'd rather go to a movie. 3. Why are you afraid to fly in an airplane? Read this report. It proves 4. Right now I’m single. I can't predict my future exactly, but I assume 5. Last night I had a bad dream. In fact, it was a nightmare. I dreamed 6. The police are investigating the burglary. They don't have much evidence, but they suspect_______________________________________________ ________ ____ :____ 7. My cousin feels that people in the United States are unfriendly, but I disagree with him. I've discovered____________________________________________ ________ ______ 8. I've learned many things about life in the United States since I came here, For example, I’ve learned________________ :_____________________________________________ 9. I always know when Paul is nervous. Have you ever noticed_______________________ 10. I believe that it is wrong to judge another person on the basis of race, religion, or sex. I believe________________________________________________________ _________ 11. World hunger is a serious problem. Do you realize_____________________ _________ 12. Don't throw that plastic bag into the sea! Don't you know

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 381

(d) A: Is All at home? B: I d o n 't th in k so. {Idon't think that All is a t home.) (e) A: Is Jack married? B: I d o n 't b e lie v e so. {Idon't believe that Jack ừ married.)

Negative usage of think so and believe so: Cách dùng phủ định của think so và be­ lieve so:

(f)A : Did you fail the test? B: I h o p e m t. {Ihope that I didn't fa il the test)

Negative usage of hope in conversational responses: Cách dùng phủ định của hope trong các câu trả lời thường đàm: I hope not.

Ĩ don't think so. I don't believe so.

□ E X E R C IS E 16 - ORAL: Give the fu ll idea of SPEAKER B's answers to A's ques­ tions by using a “ifazi-clause.”

1. A: Is Karen going to be home tonight? B: I think so. -* I thừik that Karen ừ gomg to be home tonight. 2. A: Is the library open on Sunday evenings? B: I believe so. 3. A: Does Ann speak Spanish? B: I don't think so. 4. A: Are we going to have a test in grammar tomorrow? B: I don't believe so. 5. A: Will Tina be at the conference in March? B: I hope so. 6. A: Will your flight be canceled because of the bad weather in Denver? B: I hope not.

□ EXERCISE 17 - ORAL (BOOKS CLOSED): Answer the questions by using think so or believe so if you are n o t sure, or yes or no if you are sure. Example: Does this book have more than (400) pages? Response: I think/believe so. OR: I don't think/don’t believe so. OR: Yes, it does. OR: No, it doesn't. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Does ( . . . ) have a car? Are we going to have a test tomorrow? Is there a fire extinguisher in this building? Is Chicago farther north than New York City? Does the word “patient” have more than one meaning? FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 383

COMMON EXPRESSIONS FOLLOWED BY “THA 7-CLAUSES”* CÁC THÀNH NGỮ THÔNG DỤNG Được MỆNH Đ Ì THAT THEO SAU be afraid that be aware that be certain that be convmced that

be disappointed that be glad that be happy that be pleased that

* The above list contains expressions emphasized in the exercises. Some other common expressions with be that are frequently followed by "that-clauses" are:

be sorry that be sure that be surprised that be worried that

It ừ true th a t. It is a fa c t th a t.

Bảng kê trên có các thành ngữdược nhấn mạnh trong các bài tập. Một số các thành ngữ thông dụng khác với be thường được "mệnh đề that" theo sau là:

be am azed that

be delighted that

be impressed that

be angry that be ashamed that

be fortunate that be furious that

be lucky that be positive that

be astounded that

be horrified that

be proud that

be sad that

be shocked that be terrified that be thrilled that

□ EXERCISE 18 - ORAL: Com plete th e sentences. U se an y appropriate verb form in th e “i/zaf-clause.” (Notice th e various verb form s u sed in th e example.) O m it that if yớu wish. Example: I'm glad t h a t . . . . the weather is nice today. I passed the test. Responses: I'm glad that Sam is going to finish school. I've already finished my homework. I can speak English. 1. I'm pleased t h a t . . . .

8. I'm afraid t h a t . . .

2. I'm sure t hat . . . .

9. Are you aware t h a t . . . ?

3. I'm surprised t ha t . . . .

10. I'm disappointed that

4. Are you certain that . .

11. I'm convinced t ha t . . . .

5. I'm very happy th a t. . .

12. It is true t h a t . . . .

6. I'm sorry t h a t . . . .

13. It is a fact t ha t . . . .

7. I'm not sorry t ha t . . . .

14. It's not true t ha t . . . .

* Sometimes be afraid expresses fear:

Đôi khi be afraid diễn tả sự lo sợ:

I don't want to go near that dog. I'm afraid that it will bite me. Sometimes be afraid expresses polite regret: I'm afraidyou have the wrong number. = I'm

Tôi không muốn dến gần con chó đó. Tôi sợ lặ nó sẽ cắn tôi. Đôi khi be afraid diễn tả sự hối tiếc lịch sự: Tôi e là ông gọi lộn số.

Sony, but I think you have the wrong

number.

I'm afraid I can't come to your party. = I'm sorry, but I can't come to your party.

Tói e là tôi không thể đến dự buổi tiệc của ông dược.

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 385

15

CHAPTER

Quoted Speech and Reported Speech Câu trích dẫn và câu tường thuật 15-1 QUOTED SPEECH

CÂU TRÍCH DẪN

Sometimes we w ant to quote a speaker's w ords— to write a speaker's exact words. Exact quotations are used in m any kinds of writing, such as newspaper articles, stories and novels, and academic papers. When we quote a speaker's words, we use quotation marks. Đôi khi chúng ta muốn trích dẫn lời của người nói—viết chính xác các từ của người nói. Các trích dẫn chính xác được dùng trong nhiều loại văn viết, như các bài báo, các câu chuyện và tiểu thuyết,và các bài viết học thuật. Khi chúng ta trích dẫn lời của người nói, chúng ta dùng dấu ngoặc kép. SPEAKER: SPEAKER’S EXACT WORDS NGƯỜI NÓI: LỜI CHÍNH XÁCCỦA NGƯỜI NÓI

QUOTING THE SPEAKER'S WORDS TRÍCH DAN LỜI CỦA NGƯỜI NÓI

Jane: Cats are fu n to watch. (a) Jane said, “Cats are fun to watch.” Mike: Yes, I agree. They're graceful (b) Mike said, “Yes, I agree. They're and playful. Do you own a cat? graceful and playful. Do you own a cat?” HOW T O WRITE QUOTATIONS: CÁCH VIẾT CÁC LỜI TRÍCH DAN:

L Put a com m a after s a id * _____________ ___ . Jane said, Đặt dấu phẩy sau said. 2 Put quotation marks. ________________ ----- . Jane said, “ Đặt dấu ngoặc kép. 3 Capitalize the first word of die quotation . — ► Jane said, “C Viết hoa từ đầu tiên của lời trích dẫn. 4 Write die quotation. Put a final period. _----- . Jane said, “Cats are fun to watch. Viết lời trích dẫn. Đặt dấu châm sau cùng 5i Put quotation marks after the period. _ ----- ► Jane said, “Cats are fun to watch.” Đặt dấu ngoặc kép sau dấu chấm. * Other common verbs besides say that intro­ duce quotations: admit, announce, answer,

ask, complain, explain, inquire, report, reply, shout, state, write.

Ngoài say các động từ thông dụng khác giới thiệu câu trích dẫn: admit, announce, answer, ask, complain, explain, inquire, report, reply, shout, state, write.

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 387

7. THE FOX:

I'm going to eat you.*

□ EXERCISE 2 - ORAL/WRITTEN (BOOKS CLOSED): P ra c tic e w ritin g q u o te d speech.

1. Write exactly what I say. Identify that I said it. Punctuate carefully. a. (Say one short sentence — e.g., The weather is nice today.) b. (Say two short sentences — e.g., The weather is nice today. It's warm.)

c. (Say two short sentences and one question — e.g., 77ie weather ừ nice today. It's warm. Do you like warm weather?) 2. Write exactly what your classmates say. a. ( . . . ) , please say one short sentence. b. ( . . ) , please ask one short question. c. ( . . . ) , please say one short sentence and ask one short question. 3. ( . . . ) and I are going to have a short conversation. Everyone should write exactly what we

say. 4. Pair up with another student. Have a brief conversation. Then write your conversation

using quoted speech.

* In folk tales, animals are frequently given the ability to speak.

Trong các truyện dân gian, các con vật thường được cho khả năng nói được.

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 389

15-3 VERB FORM USAGE IN REPORTED SPEECH: FORMAL SEQUENCE OF TENSES CÁCH DỬNG DẠNG ĐỘNG TỪTRONG CÂU TƯỜNG THUẬT: S ự PHỒI HỢP CÁC THÌ TRONG LÔI NÓI TRANG TRỌNG FORMAL:

TRANG TRỌNG:

(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f ) (g) (h) (i) (j ) (k) (1)

If the m ain verb of die sentence is in the past (e.g., said), the verb in the noun clause is usually also in a past form * Notice the verb form changes in the examples below. Nếu động từ chính của câu ở quá khứ (vd: said), động từ trong mệnh đề danh từ cũng thuừng ở dạng quá khứ. Lưu ý dạng động từ thay đổi trong các ví dụ dưối đây.

QUOTED SPEECH

REPORTED SPEECH

He said, "I work hard.’He said, “I am working hard.— He said, “I have worked hard.— He said, “I worked hard.”-------He said, “I am going to work hard .He said, “I w ill work hard.”----------He said, “I can work hard.’!-----------He said, “I may work hard.”---------He said, “I have to work hard.”-----He said, "I must work hard.”---------He said, “I should work hard.”------He said, “I ought to work hard.”-----

He said (that) he worked hard. He said (that) he was working hard. He said (that) he had worked hard. He said (that) he had worked hard. He said (that) he was going to work hard. He said (that) he would work hard. He said (that) he could work hard. He said (that) he might work hard. He said (that) he had to work hard. He said (that) he had to work hard. He said (that) he should work hard, (no change) He said (that) he ought to work hard. (no change)

INFORMAL:

THÂN MẬT:

Sometimes, especially in speaking, die verb in the noun clause is not changed if the speaker is reporting something immediately or soon after it was said. Đôi khi, đặc biệt trong văn nói, động từ trong mệnh đề danh từ không đổi nếu người nói đang tường thuật điều gì đó ngay lập tức hoặc ngay sau khi nó được nói.

(m) Immediate reporting: Tiiờng thuật ngay lập tức:

A: What did Ann just say? I didn't hear her. B: She said (that) she ừ hungry.

(n) Later reporting: Tường thuật sau đó:

A: What did Ann say when she got home last night? B: She said (that) she was hungry.

* If the main verb of the sentence is in the present

Nếu độnỹ từ chính của câu ở hiện tại (vd: says),

(e.g., says), no change is made in the verb tense

không đoi thì của động từ hoặc động từ khuyết

or modal in the noun clause.

trong mệnh đề danh từ.

He He He He

says, says, says, says,

"I work hard." --------------- * He "I'm working hard."_______ * He "I worked hard."________ , He "I will work hard."_______ . He

says says says says

(that) he works hard. (that) he's working hard. (that) he worked hard. (that) he will work hard.

FUNDAMENTALS O F E N G L IS H

G RAM M AR - 391

I will call you tomorrow. I know your cousin. I have met your roommate. I'm getting hungry. I'm not married. I like your (shirt/blouse). I won't be in class tomorrow. I can't read your handwriting. I don't like (a kuid o f food).

I walked to school this morning. I have to take another English course. I think you speak English very well. You should see ( title o f a movie). I'll meet you after class for a cup of coffee. I'm going to take a vacation in (Hawaii). Your pronunciation is very good. I've already seen (title ofam ovw). I may be absent from class tomorrow.

□ EXERCISE 6 - ORAL (BOOKS CLOSED): Practice reporting a writer's words. STUDENT A: Write one sentence on a piece of paper. Begin your sentence with "I.” Sign your name. Hand your paper to STUDENT B. STUDENT B: Report what STUDENT A has written. U se the verb wrote instead of said.

Exampừ: (Pablo) writes something on a piece of paper.

Written: í mỷ o itỷ to

ểiưíũk a t Mo.C'Vonwd's.

Reported: (Pablo) wrote that he was (OR: is) going to have lunch at MacDonald's.

15-5 USIN G

A S K IF

DÙNG A S K IF

Ask, NOT say or tell, is used to report yes/no questions. Dùng ask, KHÔNG phải say hoặc tell để tường thuật câu hỏi yes/no.

YES/NO QUESTION

NOUN CLAUSE

Sam said to m e , “Are you hungry?' Sam said to Jane, “Are you hungry ? ’ ( c ) INCORRECT: Sam asked me that I was hungry.

*ln immediate reporting, it is not necessary to change the noun clause verb toa past form. You may wish to practice both forms: Immediate reporting, informal:

(a) Sam asked me if I was hungry. (b) Sam asked Jane if she was hungry.

If, NOT that, is used after ask to inư oduce a n o u n clause. Dùng if, KHÔNG phải that, sau ask để giới thiệu mệnh đề danh từ. Trong lời tường thuật ngay lập tức, không cln đổi động từ của mệnh de danh từ sang dạng quá khứ. Có Ihể bạn muôn luyện tập cả hai dạng: Lời tường thuật ngay lập tức, thân mậl:

(All) told me that he needs to talk to me. Formal sequence of tenses:

Sự phối hợp các thì trong lời nói trang trọng:

(All) told me that he needed to talk to me. NOTE: In spoken English and in informal written English, sometimes native speakers change noun clause verbs to past forms and sometimes they don't.

LUU Ý: Trong tiếng Anh nói và trong tiếng Anh viết thân mật, đôi khi người bản ngữđổi động từ trong mệnh đề danh từ sang dạng quá khứ và đôi khi họ không đổi.

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 393

16. 17. 18. 19. 20.

Can you come to my party? Do you have a car? Have you ever been in (Russia)? Did you move into a new apartment? Are you going to call me tonight?

□ EXERCISE 8 - ORAL: Practice using noun clauses after asked.* STUDENT A: Say the words in the book to STUDENT B. STUDENT B: Don't look at your book. Report STUDENT A's question. Use asked. Example: Where do you live? STUDENT A: Where do you live? STUDENT B: (Maria) asked me where I live. OR: (Maria) asked me where I lived. 1. Where is your apartment? 2. Is your apartment far from here? 3. What do you need? 4. Do you need a pen? 5. When does the sem ester end? 6. Does the semester end in (December)? 7. Why is ( . . . ) absent? 8. Is ( . . . ) absent? 9. How often do you go downtown? 10. Do you go downtown every week?

□ EXERCISE 9: Complete the sentences by changing the quoted speech to re­ ported speech. Practice using th e formal sequence of tenses. 1. Bob said, “Where do you live?” Bob asked me

tưh&r-cíể/v-edl,______________________________________________

2. He said, “Do you live in the dorm?” He asked m e______________________________________________________________ 3. I said, “I have my own apartment.” I told him_________________________________________________________________ 4. He said, “I'm looking for a new apartment.” He said__________________________________________________________________ 5. He said, “I don't like living in the dorm.” He told m e_______________________________________________________________

* See 14-2 for the use of question words in noun clauses.

Xem 14-2 về cách dùng các từ hỏi trong mệnh dề danh từ.

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 395

□ EXERCISE 11: Complete the sentences by changing the sentences in quota­ tion m arks to noun clauses. Practice using the formal sequence of tenses. 1. “ Where do you live?’ Tom asked me . . . u/kef-i / ể/ơ-ed. 2. “Do you live m the dorm?' He asked me . . . iậ / ểtư-edin the- dorm. 3. “I stole the money." The thief admitted . . . th>nt

h a d stoểen

mũneỷ,

4. “ Where is Jane?’ Ed asked me . . . . 5. “I'm gorng to quit school and get a job." Jessica announced . . . . 6. “Did you mail the letter?’ Tim asked me . . . . 7. “ W hat are you thinking about?” Karen asked me . . . . 8. “I have to go to the drug store." Steve said . . . . 9. “I can't pick you up at the airport." Alice told me . . . . 10. “I will take a taxi.” I told her . . . . 1 1 . " You should speak English as much as possible.” My teacher told me . . . . 12. "Do you like spaghetti? ’ Don asked me . . . . 13. “Have you already eaten dinnerĩ’ Sue asked me . . . . 14. “Dúi you finish your work? ’ Jackie asked me . . . . 15. “W hat time đo you want to leave fo r the airport? ’ Harry asked me . . . . 16. " I made a mừtake." Carol admitted . . . . 17. “The fm a l exam will be on the 15th." The teacher announced----18. “A n earthquake occurred in Peru.’’ The newspaper reported . . . .

□ EXERCISE 12 - WRITTEN: Complete the following. Use the formal sequence of tenses. 1. . . . asked me i f . . . .

5. . . . asked me when . . . .

2. . . . asked me where . . . .

6. . . . told my friend t h a t . . . .

3. . . . told nje t h a t . . . .

7. . . . asked my friend i f ----------

4. . . . said t ha t . . . .

8. . . . asked my friend why . . . .

□ EXERCISE 13: Read th e dialogues and complete the sentences. Use the for­ mal sequence of tenses. 1. A: Oh no! I forgot m y briefcase! W hat am I going to dữ? B: I don't know. -> When Bill got on the bus, he realized that he

FUNDAMENTALS

h a d ệor-ỷỡtteK

his briefcase.

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 397

9. A: Will you be home in từne for dmner? B: I'll be home around 5:30. -» My wife asked me if I _____________________ home in time for dinner. I told her that I _____________________ home around 5:30. ; 10. A: H ave you ever been in Mexico? B: Yes, I have. Several times. -> I asked George if h e ____________ e v e r_________'

in Mexico. He said that he

_____________________ there several times.

15-6 USIN G VERB + INFINITIVE TO REPORT SPEECH D Ù N G Đ Ộ N G T ừ + Đ Ộ N G T Ừ N G U Y ÊN T H Ể Đ Ể TƯ Ờ N G TH U Ậ T LỜI NÓI QUOTED SPEECH (a) Joe (b) Joe ( c ) Joe my

REPORTED SPEECH

said, “Please come to my party.” said, "Can you come to my party?” said, “Would you like to come to party?”

(d ) Joe invited me to come to hừ party.

s + V + o + INFINITIVE PHRASE Some verbs are followed imm ediate­ (e) Ijoe1 '‘invited} 'm e' 1to come to his party.1 ly by a (pro)noun object and then an infinitive phrase. These verbs (see ( f) I told A n n to study harder. the list below) are often used to re­ port speech. Đại tìựDanh từ tân ngữ theo ngay sau một số động từ và sau đó cụm động từ nguyên thể. Các động từnày (xem bảng kê dưới đây) thường được dùng để tuờng thuật lời nói. REPORTING SPEECH: VERB + (PRO)NOUN OBJECT + INFINITIVE* TƯỜNG THUẬT LỜI NÓI: ĐỘNG TỪ+ĐẠI TỪ/DANH TỪ TÂN NGỮ + ĐỘNG TỪ NGUYÊN THỂ

advise someone to ask someone to encourage someone to

mvite someone to order someone to permit someone to

* Other common verbs followed by a (pro)noun object and an infinitive:

allow beg challenge

remind someone to tell someone to warn someone to

Các động từ thông dụng khác được theo sau bởi đại từ/danh từ tân ngữ và động từ nguyên thể:

convince direct expect

FUNDAMENTALS

instruct persuade urge OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 399

□ EXERCISE 15: Following are some dialogues. Report the first speaker's words. Use the verb in parentheses and an infinitive phrase. 1.

JOE: Would you like to go to a movie with me? MARY: Yes.

(iinvite)

. I cut the rope w ith a knife. 7. I thanked him for d r iv in g me to the airport. I. I t is difficult to learn a second language. 9. It is important to g e t an education,/ je t t i n g an education is important. 10. Timmy isn't o ld e n o u g h to get married. 1. Do you want to go 0 swimming tomorrow? 12. I went to the bank to cash® check. 3. I was too sleepy to finish my homework last night. 14. It is easy to do this exerise./D oing this exercise is easy.15. Last night I w a s too tired to d o my homework. 6. I've never gone sailing, but I would like to.

] EXERCISE 30, p. 294. Phrasal verbs. (Chart 10-13) iNSWERS: I. it down 3. it up . it out 10. me out

4. me up 5. you back 6. it up 7. it off 8. it back 11. it back 12. them away ■ 13. it off 14. it on

Chapter 77: PASSIVE SENTENCES ] EXERCISE 1, p. 297. Passive form and meaning. (Chart 11-2) \NSWERS: . b. Jane is helped c. We are helped 2. a. I was helped b. They were helped . a. Joe has been helped b. We have been helped 4. a. I will be helped b. I am ;oing to be helped c. Tim will be helped d. Tim is going to be helped

1 EXERCISE 2, p. 298. Passive form and meaning. (Chart 11-2) iNSWERS: is delivered 3. has been eaten >. will be taught 7. are employed 0. was bought 11. will be done

4. was written 5. is going to be fixed 8. has been hired 9. are going to be faxed 12. were washed

HEXERCISE 3, p. 299. Passive form and meaning. (Chart 11-2) \NSWERS: Ỉ. The phonograph was invented by Thomas Edison. 3. An island is surrounded by rater. 4. Our hotel room will be cleaned by a maid. 5. The leaky faucet is going to >e fixed by a plumber. 6. The sick child has been examined by a doctor. 7. James >wan was aưested by the police. 8. Spanish is spoken by a large number of people. ). The letter is going to be answered by the secretary. 10. Carlos was confused by ,he teacher's explanation. 11. I was embarrassed by my mistake. 12. Children are ascinated by helicopters. 13. Hamlet was written by Shakespeare. 14. You will be m azed by this news. FUNDAMENTALS OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 495

□ EXERCISE 8, p. 305. The BY-phrase. (Chart / / -4) ANSWERS: 1. The Red Cross was established in 1864. 2. When was this school established? 3. The garbage is collected on Thursdays. 4. The garbage won't be collected tomor­ row. 5. Writing is spelled with one "t.” 6. Writing isn't spelled with two “t's.” 7. Written is spelled with two “t's.” 8. A new hospital is going to be built next year. 9. When was the Suez Canal built? [Note: The Suez Canal was begun in 1859 and completed in 1869.] 10. That composition was written by Olga. 11. I have been accepted by the University of Minnesota. 12. Calculus isn't taught in elementary school. 13. The 1988 Summer Olympics were held in Seoul, Korea. 14. The mail isn't delivered on holidays. 15. Will the mail be delivered tomorrow? 16. My tape recorder was made in Japan. 17. Where was your tape' recorder made? 18. That table was made by my grandfather. 19. I've never been hypnotized. 20. Were you confused by my direc­ tions?

□ EXERCISE 9, p. 306. Active us. passive. (Charts Ỉ 1-1 -*11-4) ANSWERS: 2. is read 3. was interrupted 4. belongs 5. is delivered 6. is not pronounced 7. happened 8. arrived ... was met 9. heard ... was surprised ... was shocked. 10. will be built 11. wrote ... was written 12. was discovered 13. was kicked ... attended/were attending 14. am confused 15. have been accepted 16. agree ...prefer 17. was your bike stolen 18. Have you paid ...will be/is going to be shut off 19. B:happened A :washit B: Was the bicyclist injured A: called... was tak en ... (was) treated B: happened A: was arrested B: wasn't killed 20. is ... is visited ... was designed ... was erected ... has been ... is recognized

□ EXERCISE 10, p. 308. Passive progressive verbs. (Chart / 1-5) ANSWERS: 1. A new house is being built on Elm Street. 2. That house is being built by the Smith Construction Company. 3. This sentence is being read by Yoko. 4. it is being painted. 5. it was being painted. 6. the equipment is being fixed. 7. the equip­ ment was being fixed. 8. My shoes are being repaired. 9. My shoes were being re­ paired. 10. A student trip to the art museum is being organized.

□ EXERCISE 11, p. 309. Passive modal auxiliaries. (Chart / 1-6) ANSWERS: 2. Medicine can be prescribed by a doctor. 3. Tomatoes should be planted in the spring. 4. This report must be signed by Mr. Hook. 5. A new post office may be built on First Street. 6. Beer may not be sold to minors. 7. I can be reached at 555-3815. 8. Stamps have to be placed in the upper right-hand comer of an envelope. 9. That fence ought to be painted. 10. The weather cannot be controlled. 11. Our car had to be fixed before we left for Chicago. 12. The assignment must be done by all of the students. FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAMMAR

- 497

EXERCISE 16, p. 315. Stative passive + prepositions. (Chart / 1-8) •JSWERS: for 3. to 4. of 5. to 6. for 7. with 8. about . in/with 12. about 13. of 14. to 15. in 16. with 1. in 19. with 20. to 21. of 22. with

9. to 17.

10. with with

EXERCISE 18, p. 316. Stative passive + prepositions. (Chart 11-8) HSWERS: are divorced 4. Are ... related to 5- is spoiled 6. was exhausted 7. was rolvedin 8. is located in 9. is drunk 10. am interested in 11. is devoted 12. Are ... lost 13. were terrified 14. Are ... acquainted with 15. was... lalified for 16. am disappointed in/with 17. am done with 18. is crowded >. Are ... shut 20. is gone

EXERCISE 19, p. 318. Parĩiàpial adjectives. (Chart / 1-9) NSWERS: a. a. a. a.

boring depressed interested embarrassing

b. bored b. depressing b. interesting b. embarrassed

6. a. shocking 7. a. fascinated 8. a. excited

b. shocked b. fascinating b. exciting

EXERCISE 20, p. 318. Participial adjectives. (Chart 11-9) [NSWERS: interested 3. confused 4. exciting 5. confused 6. interesting . surprising 8. bored 9. boring 10. fascinating 11. fascinated 2. fascinating 13. embarrassed 14. embarrassing 15. shocking ... shocked 6. exciting... excited

] EXERCISE 21, p. 320. GET + adjective/past partiãple. (Chart 11-10) ANSWERS: .. hot 3. full 4. dressed 5. bald 10. bored 11. hungry 6. dizzy 17. sick 18. drunk

married 6. confused 7. lost 8. 12. late 13. rich 14. arrested 19. sleepy 20. tired

FUNDAMENTALS

angry 15. hurt

OF ENGLISH GRAMMAR

- 499

>f fluids. 7. They are supposed to read Chapter 10 and answer the questions at the end of he chapter. 8. They are supposed to read the directions carefully, use a No. 2 pencil, and ■aise their hand(s) if they have any questions. [Note: The use of a singular vs. plural noun hand vs. hands) in this instance is a matter of style rather than grammar. Either is grammatically :orrect.]

Chapter 12: ADJECTIVE CLAUSES 1 EXERCISE 1, p. 330. W HO and W HOM in adjective clauses.

(Chart 12-2) ANSWERS: I. The police officer who gave me directions was friendly. 4. The waitress who erved us dinner was friendly. 5. I don't know the man who is talking to Rita. Í. The people whom I met at the party last night were very nice. 7. The woman yhom I helped thanked me. 8. Do you like the mechanic who fixed vour car? Mr. Polanski is a mechanic whom YOU can trust. 10. The people who live next to ne have three cars. 11. I talked to the woman who was sitting next to me. 12. I alked to the people who were sitting next to me. 13. The woman whom I saw was talking her dog. 14. The people whom I saw at the park were playing football.

1 EXERCISE 2, p. 330. Adjective clauses in definitions.

(Chart 12-2) ANSWERS: í. c

3. g

4. j

5. a

6. b

7. f

8. d

9. i

10. h

: EXERCISE 4, p. 332. WHO, WHOM,; and THAT in adjective clauses. (Chart 12-3) ANSWERS: who I. who

3. who(m)/0 4. who 9. who 10. who(m)/0

5. who

6. who(m)/0

7. who(m)/0

3 EXERCISE 5, p. 334. WHICH; WHO, WHOM,, arid THAT in adjective clauses. (Charts Ỉ2-Í -> J2-4) ANSWERS: I. The soup which / that / 0 I had for lunch was too salty. 3. I have a class which / hat begins at 8:00 A.M. 4. I know a man who / that doesn't have to work for a living. >. My daughter asked me a question which / that / 0 1 couldn't answer. 6. All of the people who(m) / that / 0 1 asked to mv party can come. 7. I lost the scarf w hich/that/ 3 I borrowed from mv roommate. 8. A lion is an animal which / that lives in Africa. ). A globe is a ball which / that has a map of the world on it. 10. Where can I catch he bus which / that goes downtown? 11. The bus which /that / 0 1 take to school FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 501

ìedicine for my sore throat. OR to whom I went yesterday 10. The cream which/ tot/ 0 I put in mv coffee was spoiled. 11. The fast-forward button on the tape recorder irhich/that/0 I bought last month doesn't work. 12. Here is the brochure which/that/ 9 you asked me about. OR about which you asked me 13. The man who(m)/that/0 nv sister goes out with is tall, dark, and handsome. OR with whom mv sister goes out 4. The university w hich/thaư0 Ĩ want to go to is in New York. OR to which I want to k> 15. The plane w hich/that/0 I'm taking to Denver leaves at 7:08 P.M. 16. I'm ioing to call about the want ad w hich/that/01 saw in last night's paper.

1 EXERCISE 10, p. 339. WHOSE in adịecáve clauses. (Chart Í2-7) ANSWERS: I. There is the woman whose cat died. 3. Over there is the man whose daughter I'm lating. 4. Over there is the woman whose husband you met yesterday. 5. There s the professor whose course I'm taking. 6. That is the man whose son is an astronaut. 7. That is the girl whose camera I borrowed. 8. There is the boy whose mother is a amous musician. 9. They are the people whose house we visited last month. 10. That is the couple whose apartment was burglarized.

□ EXERCISE 11, p. 339. WHOSE in adjective clauses. (Chart 12-7) ANSWERS: I. The woman whose cat died was sad. 2. The man whose daughter I'm dating is friendly. 3. The woman whose husband you met is m y teacher. 4. The professor whose course I'm taking gives hard tests. 5. The man whose daughter is an astronaut is very proud. 6. The girl whose camera I boưowed is a good friend of mine. 7. The boy whose mother is a famous musician wants to be a violinist. 8. The people whose house we visited were very nice. 9. The couple whose apartment was burgla­ rized bought new locks. 10. I have a friend whose brother is a police officer. 11. I have a neighbor whose dog barks all day long. 12. I like the people whose house we went to. [also possible, in very formal English: to whose house we went] 13. I thanked the woman whose dictionary I borrowed. 14. The woman whose purse was stolen shouted “Stop, thief!” 15. The man whose picture is in the newspaper is famous.

n EXERCISE 12, p. 340. Cumulative review. (Chart 12-7) ANSWERS: 3. whose 4. whom 5. usual usage = that [also correct: which] 6. usual usage = who [also coưect: that] 7. usual usage = 0 [also coưect: who(mythat] 8. whose 9. usual usage = 0 [also correct: which/that] 10. usual usage = who [also correct: that] I I . whom 12. whose 13. usual usage = that [also correct: which] 14. usual us­ age = who [also coưect: that] 15. usual usage = 0 [also correct: who(mythat] 16. usual mage = 0 [also correct: which/that]

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 503

Spain put together. Spain is the smallest of the four countries. Spain is much smaller than Brazil or Canada. Etc. [Note: AmE has traditionally used periods for the abbreviations for square (sq.) and mile (mi.) though some current style manuals now recommend not using periods with any abbreviations of measurement terms other than inch (in.). BrE does not use full stops for square (sq) and kilometre (km). Also, AmE spelling is kilometer.] 4. The second question is the hardest of all. The first and fourth questions are the easiest. The fourth question is just as easy as the first question. The third question is harder than the first or fourth but easier than the second. Etc. 5. c is the best handwriting. A is the worst handwriting, c is better than either A or B. A is worse than B. B is worse than c . A isn't nearly as good as c. Etc.

□ EXERCISE 2, p. 349. Comparisons with AS. ..AS. (Chart 13-1) ANSWERS: 3. I was ( just) as tired as Susan. 4. Adam wasn't (nearly) as/so tired as Susan. 5. My apartment is (just) as big as Po's. 6. My apartment is not (quite) as/so big as All's. 7. My apartment is not (nearly) as/so big as Anna's. 8. Glass 1 is (just) as full as glass 2. Glass 3 is not (quite) as/so full as Glass 4. Etc.

□ EXERCISE 3, p. 349. Comparisons with A S . ..AS. (Chari 13-1) POSSIBLE RESPONSES: 3. Money is not nearly as/so important as health. 4. Children are not quite/nearly as/so patient as adults. 5. A lake is not nearly as/so big as a sea. 6. A lion is just as dangerous and wild as a tiger. 7. A solar system is not nearly as/so large as a galaxy. 8. The Atlantic Ocean is not as/so deep as the Pacific Ocean. 9. People are not nearly as/so agile in climbing trees as monkeys. 10. In my opinion, readings novel is not quite as/so relaxing as listening to music. 11. I think a father is just as important in raising children as a mother.

□ EXERCISE 4, p. 350. Comparisons with A S . . .AS. (Chart Í 3 - 1) EXPECTED RESPONSES: 3. as fast as I can / as hard as I can. 4. as sour as a lemon. 5. a stream is not as wide as a river. 6. as difficult as I (had) expected. 7. as often / much as you can. 8. as young as you feel. [This is a commonsaying.]9. as easy as you mightthink / as easy as it looks. 10. as long to drive to the airport as it takes/does to fly to Chicago. [This item is generally difficult for students. Throughout the text, an occasional very difficult item is included to keep the better students on their toes. For example, the use of the auxiliary does in the clause completion is probably unfamiliar to most students at this level. See Chart 13-4 for the use of auxiliaries in comparison clauses.]

□ EXERCISE 5, p.

350.

Comparisons with AS. ..AS. (Chart 13-1)

ANSWERS: 2. a bull/an ox 3. a bird 4. a mule 5. a wet hen 8. a pin 9. a kite 10. a rock

FUNDAMENTALS

6. the hills

7.

a beet

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 505

□ EXERCISE 12, p. 357. Completing comparatives. (Chart 13-4) ANSWERS: 3. heavier than 4. more/less interesting than 5. denser than 6. more intelli­ gent than 7. less intelligent than 8. less frequently than 9. more refreshing than 10. less fortunate than

□ EXERCISE 14, p. 358. Comparatives with nouns, adjectives, and adverbs. (Chart 13-5) ANSWERS: 4. more information (noun) 5. happier (adj) 6. more happily (adv) 7. more happiness (noun) 8. more mistakes (noun) 9. more responsibly (adv) 10. more responsibilities (noun) 11. more responsible (adj) 12. quicker (adj) 13. more salt (noun) 14. more doctors (noun) 15. more people (noun)

□ EXERCISE 15, p. 360. Repeating a comparative. (Chart 13-6) ANSWERS: 2. bigger and bigger 3. longer and longer 4. more and more enthusiastic [also possible: louder and louder] 5. hotter and hotter 6. more and more discouraged 7. louder and louder 8. angrier and angrier/more and more angry

□ EXERCISE 16, p. 361. Double comparatives. (Chart 13-7) ANSWERS: 2. longer I waited, the angrier/more angry I got. 3. olderyou are, the more you under­ stand. 4. faster she drove, the more nervous I became. 5. more he thought about his family, the more homesick he became. 6. the darker the sky grew, the faster we ran to reach the house. 7. more I thought about it, the more confused I became.

8. more the air is polluted [OR: the more polluted the aừ (is)], the greater the chances of developing respiratory diseases. [OR: the greater are the chances of developing respiratory dis­ eases OR the greater the chances of developing respiratory diseases are].

□ EXERCISE 17, p. 362. Superiatives. (Chart Ỉ3-8) POSSIBLE RESPONSES: 2. the w ise st... I know 3. the friendliest... I have ever lived in 4. the most em­ barrassing ... you have ever had 5. the most im portant... in your country 6. the highest... in Asia 7. the laziest... I know/i've ever known 8. the least ambitious ... I know 9. the least expensive ... in a store 10. the least useful or least important ... you own

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAMMAR

- 507

:osts? 12. what this word means? 13. what country Anna is from? 14. why Kathy was absent yesterday? 15. how far it is to Chicago. 16. when the semester ends? 17. what Sue is talking about. 18. when David arrived. 19. when he is going to leave? 20. where I can buy a good radio?

□ EXERCISE 2, p. 370. Noun clauses that begin with a question word. (Charts Ỉ4-Ì and Ỉ4-2) ANSWERS: 3. who(m) Helen talked to? 4. who lives in that apartment? 5. what happened. 6. what he said. 7. what kind of car Pat has. 8. how old their children are. 9. why you said that. 10. where I can catch the bus. 11. who broke the window? 12. who Sara invited. 13. how long Ted has been living there? 14. what time flight 677 is supposed to arrive? 15. why Yoko is angry?

□ EXERCISE 3, p. 372. Noun clauses with WHO, WHAT, WHOSE + BE. (Chart 14-3) ANSWERS: 1. who she is. 2. who they are. 3. what that is? 4. what those are? 5. whose book that is. 6. whose books those are? 7. what a wrench is? 8. who that woman is. 9. whose house that is. 10. what a clause is? 11. what is in that drawer. 12. who is in that room. 13. whose car is in the driveway? 14. whose car that is? 15. what is on TV tonight. 16. what a carrot is? 17. whose glasses those are? 18. who I am. 19. what is at the end of the rainbow. [In Western folklore, there is a pot of gold at the end of the rainbow.]

□ EXERCISE 4, p. 372. Noun clauses that begin with a question word. (Chan 14-3) ANSWERS: I don't know ... 1. where ( . . . ) went yesterday. 2. what ( . . .) bought yesterday. 3. why ( . . . ) is absent. 4. where ( . . . ) is. 5. how old ( . . . ) is. 6. where ( .. .) lives. 7. where ( . . . ) eats lunch. 8. what (... )'s last name is, 9. why ( . . . ) goes downtown every day. 10. what time ( . . . ) usually gets up. 11. why ( . . . ) went downtown yesterday. 12. when ( . . . ) got home last night. 13. what time (...) went to bed last night. 14. what time it is. 15. what time ( ...) eats dinner. 16. how long (... ) has been living here. 17. who broke that window. 18. who ( ... ) called last night. 19. what happened in (Brazil) yesterday. 20. what (...) ate for breakfast. 21. who wrote ( War and Peace). [Lev Tolstoy is the author of the Russian novel War and Peace.] 22. who ( . . . ) saw yesterday. 23. what caused the earthquake in (Iran). I 24. what causes earthquakes. 25. who that girl is. 26. who those people are. 27. whose (backpack) that is. 28. whose (gloves) those are. 29. what kind of tree that is. 30. what kind of car ( . . . ) has.

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 509

5. how much that book costs? 16. ii/whether there is life on other planets. 7. ifAvhether we are going to have a test tomorrow. 18. if/whether there is a Santa laus. [Note: “a Santa Claus” means a real person with that name. Santa Claus is a folklore figure 'ho brings presents to children at Christmas.] 19. who that man is. 20. if/whether lat man is a teacher.

] EXERCISE 10, p. 377. Noun clauses. (Charts 14-1 -* 14-4) iNSWERS: |. I wonder why ( . . . ) is absent today. 2. I wonder where ( . . . ) is. 3. I wonder w Whether ( . . . ) is sick. 4. I wonder if/whether it will (snow) tomorcow. 5. I wonder w h e th e r the weather will be nice tomorrow. [Note: weather and whether have the same renunciation.] 6. I wonder ii/whether ( . . . ) is going to be in class tomorrow. I wonder how long ( . . . ) has been living here. 8. I wonder ^w hether ( . . .) went to he library last night. 9. I wonder how much (a Rolls Royce) costs. 1Ọ. I wonder Inhere ( . . . ) went last night. 11. I wonder who lives in that house. 12. I wonder vho that woman is. 13. I wonder if/whether that woman is a teacher. 14. I wonder vhose (book) that is. 15. I wonder whose (gloves) those are. 16. I wonder whose pen) that is. 17. I wonder whose (papers) those are. 18. I wonder ifAvhether (...) studied last night. 19. I wonder ^w hether ( . . . ) has a car. 20. I wonder how far it s to (St. Louis).

D EXERCISE 11, p. 377. Noun clauses. (Charts 14-1 -* Ĩ4-4) \NSWERS: 2. what an amphibian is? 3. if/whether a frog is an amphibian? 4. what's on TV :onight. 5. what the speed of sound is? [Note: It depends on the medium through which it travels. Sound travels faster through liquids and solids than through air.] 6. ii/whether sound travels faster than light? [Note: The speed of light is much fester than the speed of sound—which is why we see lightning before we hear thunder.] 7. if/whether dogs are color blind? [Note: Dogs are color blind.] 8. why the sky is blue. 9. ^w hether that store accepts credit cards? 10. ii/whether insects have ears. [Note: Most insects do not have "ears.” They "hear” through tiny hairs on theừ antennae that vibrate when sound waves strike them . Also of possible interest: insects do not have voices. They make noises by nibbing body parts against each other.] 11. when the next earthquake will occur in California. 12. itfwhether there will be another earthquake in California this year. 13. i^whether animals have the same emotions as human beings. 14. how dolphins communicate with each other? 15. ^w hether people can communicate with dolphins. 16. ii/whether beings from outer space have ever visited the earth.

□ EXERCISE 14, p. 381. Noun clauses that begin with THAT. (Chart 14-5) ANSWERS: 2. (that) I should study tonight. 3. (that) flying in an airplane .... 4. (that) I will get manned... 5. (that) a huge monster was .... 6. (that) John “Cat Man” ....

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 511

s. John F. Kennedy said, “Ask not what your country can do for you. Ask what you can do for your country.” [John F. Kennedy was the president of the United States from 1960 until No­ vember 22, Ị963, when he was shot to death. This is one of his most memorable quotes.]

7. The fox said, “I'm going to eat you.” The rabbit replied, “You have to catch me first!”

□ EXERCISE 4, p. 392. Formal sequence of tenses in reported speech. (Charts 15-2 and 15-3) ANSWERS:

I. Sally said (that) she didn't like chocolate. 3. Mary said (that) she was planning to :akc a trip. 4. Tom said (that) he had already eaten lunch. 5. Kate said (that) she lad called her doctor. 6. Mr. Rice said (that) he was going to go to Chicago. 7. Eric said (that) he would come to the meeting. 8. Jean said (that) she couldn't afford :o buy a new car. 9. Jessica said (that) she might go to the library. 10. Ted said that) he had to finish his work. 11. Ms. Young said (that) she had to talk to Professor iỉeed. 12. Alice said (that) she should visit her aunt and uncle.

□ EXERCISE 9, p. 395. Quoted speech us. reported speech. (Chans 15-2 -> 15-5) ANSWERS (with formal sequence of tenses):

1. if I lived in the dorm. 3. that I had my own apartment. 4. that he was looking :o r a new apartment. 5. that he didn’t like living in the dorm. 6. if he wanted to nove in with me. 7. where my apartment was. 8. that I lived on Seventh Avenue., that he couldn't move until the end of the semester. 10. that he would cancel his form contract at the end of the semester. 11. if that was okay. 12. that I was lookng forward to having him as a roommate. [Point out the correct spelling of roommate.]

□ EXERCISE 10, p. 396. Reported speech vs. quoted speech. (Chans 15-Í -> 15-5) ANSWERS:

2. , “Will you be at the meeting?” 3. , “Are you going to quit your job?” Í. , “Where is your car?” 5. , “What did you do after class yesterday?” [Do is the main verb; did is the auxiliary for a past tense question.] 6. , "Do you know Italian?” 7. , “Can you guess what I have in my pocket?” 8. , “Why aren't you working at your desk? Why are you wasting company’s time?”

□ EXERCISE 11, p. 397. Quoted speech vs. reported speech. (Charts 15-2 -> 15-5) ANSWERS: 4. where Jane was. 5. (that) she was going to quit school and get a job. 6. if I had .mailed the letter. 7. what I was thinking about. 8. (that) he had to go to the drug store. [Note: drug store (or drugstore) = chemist's in British usage.] 9. (that) she couldn't FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 513

] EXERCISE 16, p. 402. Q uoted and reported speech. (Charts 15-1 ^ 15-6) MSWFRS: . She asked me if /w h e th e r I wanted to go to .... 2. Tom to ld m e/said that he was lungry. 3. Bob asked me where I liv e d . 4. Ann to ld m e /s a id that she had enayed the party. 5. Kathy asked me to open the window. 6. My friend told 0 me h a t.... 7. My mother asked when I w a s coming home, [period] 8. Do you know Yhere 0 the nearest gas station is? 9. David invited me to e a t dinner with him.

0. IaskedT cm O when his p la n e w o u ld arrive, [period] o /th a t h e shouldn't pull the cat's tail.

11. I told Bobby n o t

12. Ann said, “Are you tired?” OR Ann

isked (me) if I w as tired, [period]

3 EXERCISE 17, p. 404. ADVISE, SUGGEST, RECOMMEND. (Chart 15-7) ANSWERS: . c. losing weight, d. losing weight, e. I (should) lose weight, f. I (should) lose weight. !. a. I (should) study harder, b. to study harder, c. studying harder, d. studying ìarder/that I (should) study harder. 3. buying/that I (should) buy a motorcycle. L. seeing/that I (should) see a doctor about my problem. 5. going to a movie/that we should) go to a movie. 6. going/me to go to Iowa State University.

Chapter Ĩ6: USING WISH; USING IF 3 EXERCISE 1, p. 407. Verb forms after WISH. (Chart 16-1) ANSWERS: 3. I didn't have a cold. 4. I had a tape recorder. 5. I knew how to swim. 6. he had Ỉ good job. 7. I didn't live in a dorm. 8. I lived in an apartment. 9. I could speak French. 10. she could find a good job. 11. my friend could come. 12. I were at home right now. 13. James were here. 14. it were Saturday. 15. my friends were here. 16. I didn't have to study for a test. 17. I didn't have to write a composition.

|0 EXERCISE 2, p. 408. Verb forms after WISH. (Chart 16-1) ANSWERS: 1. I wish (that) I had a car. 2. I wish (that) I had a color TV. 3. I wish (that) I could whistle. 4. I wish (that) I didn't have a headache. 5. I wish that ( .. .) were here to­ day. 6. I wish (that) it were Sunday. 7. I wish (that) I didn't have to study tonight. 8. I wish (that) I didn't have to go to the dentist. 9. I wish (that) I could speak (Ko­ rean). 10. I wish (that) I could go to (Tahiti). 11. I wish (that) I had a window fan. 12. I wish (that) I weren't sleepy. 13. I wish (that) I knew how to dance. 14. I wish (that) I knew how to play chess. 15. I wish (that) it were/weren't hot/cold today. 16. I wish (that) I had enough money to buy (a car/boat/etc.). 17. I wish (that) I didn't have to work tonight. 18. I wish (that) I could go to (the zoo, etc.) today. 19. I wish (that) I were rich and famous. 20. I wish (that) I were in (Jordan) right now. FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 515

3 EXERCISE 9, p. 412. A uxiliary verbs after WISH. (Charts 16-1 and 16-2) ANSWERS:

1. No, I didn't, but I wish I had. 2. No, I didn't, but I wish I had. 3. No, I don't, but I wish I did. 4. No, I'm not, but I wish I were. 5. No, I can't, but I wish I could. 5. No, I didn't, but I wish I had. 7. No, s/he isn't, but I wish s/he were. 8. No, I bon't, but I wish I did. 9. No, s/he didn't, but I wish s/he had. 10. No, I can't, but I wish I could. 11. No, I'm not, but I wish I were. 12. No, I don't, but I wish I did. 13. No, it isn't, but I wish it were. 14. No, s/he didn't, but I wish s/he had. 15. No, they aren't, but I wish they were. 16. No, I don't, but I wish I did. 17. No, I can't, but I wish I could. 18. No, I don't, but I wish I did.

□ EXERCISE 12, p. 415. Conditional sentences: presenưfuture. (Chart 16-3) ANSWERS:

1. a. had b. had ... would go 2. a. had b. had ... would fly 3. a. weren't b. w eren 't... would go 4. a. knew b. knew ... would go 5. a. understood b. un­ derstood ... would explain 6. a. didn't have to go b. didn't have to go ... would go ... would visit 7. a. were b. were ... would go 8. a. were b. were ... would live ... (would) raise [After and, an auxiliary is usually not repeated.]

□ EXERCISE 13, p. 416. Conditional sentences: presenưỷiiture. (Chart 16-3) ANSWERS: 2. would take ... were 3. would buy ... had 4. grew ... would be 5. would b e ... had 6. were ... would tell [If I were you is a common way to give advice to someone.] 7. were ... would fly 8. had ... would take ... had 9. would e a t ... were 10. taught/were teaching ... wouldn't give 11. had ... had ... would drive 12. w eren 't... would go

□ EXERCISE 15, p. 418. Conditional sentences: present/future. (Chart 16-4) ANSWERS: 3. have ... will/can buy

4. had ... would/could buy

5. [Erratum: In Workbook B,

the word “But” in this item is a printer's mistake. Students should cross it out. Subsequent printings

of Workbook B will delete it.] buy ... will / can drive 6. [Erratum: But should be used in this item:... But if I.... The first printing omitted the word “But." Subsequent printings of Workbook B will include it.] bought... would / could drive 7. were ... would go 8. is ... will go 9. wanted ... would go 10. w a n t... will go

FUNDAMENTALS

OF ENGLISH GRAM M AR - 517

Ngữ pháp tiếng Anh Trình độ Trung cấp

FUNDAMENTALS OF

ENGLISH GRAMMAR (tái bản)

Betty Schrampfer Azar

“Didl ttà cM ỄỊiổi Nguyễn Thành Yến

Chịu trách nhiệm xuất bản TRẦN ĐÌNH VIỆT Biên tập

ĐẢO TRỌNG ĐỨC

Trình bày sách

PHẠM VẤN VINH

Sửa bản in

VÂN ANH

NHÀ XUẤT BẢN TỔNG Hộp THÀNH PHỐ Hồ CHÍ MINH Ó2 Nguyễn Thị Minh Khai - Quận 1 •B 8225340 - 8296704 - 822272Ố - 8296713 - 8223637 Fax: 8222726 E-mail: [email protected]

Thực hiện liên doanh PHẠM THỊ THANH TÂM

In 1.000 cuốn khổ 14,5x20,5cm tại Xí nghiệp In M ACHIN CO - 21 Bùi Thị Xuân Q.1 - Thành phố Hổ C hí Minh, s ố xuất bản 507-210 / X B -Q L X B cấp ngày 8-42005. In xong và nộp lưu chiểu tháng 9-2005.